Allen-Bradley E300 User Manual
Allen-Bradley E300 is a powerful and versatile electronic overload relay that can be used to protect motors from a variety of electrical faults and overloads. It features a wide range of protection functions, including thermal overload, overtemperature protection, phase loss, ground (earth) fault, stall, jam (overcurrent), underload (undercurrent), current imbalance (asymmetry), remote trip, voltage protection, power protection, and analog protection. The E300 also has a variety of monitoring functions, including current monitoring, voltage, power, and energy monitoring, and diagnostic functions, making it a valuable tool for troubleshooting and maintenance. With its rugged construction and easy-to-use interface, the E300 is a reliable and user-friendly choice for motor protection.
Advertisement
Advertisement
User Manual
Original Instructions
E300 Electronic Overload Relay
Bulletin Numbers 193, 592
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING:
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION:
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Preface
Overview
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Expansion Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Expansion Analog I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Expansion Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Expansion Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Overtemperature Protection (PTC and RTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ground (Earth) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Underload (Undercurrent). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Current Imbalance (Asymmetry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Current Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Voltage, Power, and Energy Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Single/Three-Phase Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
EtherNet/IP Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
DeviceNet Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Optional Add-On Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Optional Expansion I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Optional Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Optional Expansion Bus Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
3
Table of Contents
4
Diagnostic Station
System Operation and
Configuration
Standard Current-based Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Ground Fault Current-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Voltage- and Power-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Thermal-based Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Chapter 2
Parameter Group Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Linear List Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Editing a Configuration Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Editing a Numeric Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Editing a Bit Enumerated Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Programmable Display Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Stopping the Display Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Automatic Trip and Warning Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Chapter 3
Digital I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Analog I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Option Match Action (Parameter 233). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Output Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Output Relay Configuration States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Output Relay Protection Fault Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Output Relay Communication Fault Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Output Relay Communication Idle Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Diagnostic Station User-defined Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Analog I/O Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Analog Output Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Network Start Configuration States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Network Start Communication Fault Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Table of Contents
Network Start Communication Idle Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Introduction to Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Chapter 4
Overload Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Overload (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Overload (Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Overload (Local I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Overload (Custom). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Non-reversing Starter Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Non-reversing Starter (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback . . . . . 64
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control. . . . . . . 65
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control . . . . . 68
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) . . . . . . . . 71
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Two-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Non-reversing Starter (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Reversing Starter Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reversing Starter (Network). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . 87
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . 92
Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control 96
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control 97
Reversing Starter (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Two-speed Starter Operating Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Two-speed Starter (Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
5
Table of Contents
6
Protective Trip and Warning
Functions
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback. . . . . . . . 106
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control. . . . . . . . . 108
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control with Feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control . . . . . . . 111
Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) . . . . . . . . . . 113
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Two-wire Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) –
Three-wire Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Monitor Operating Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Monitor (Custom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Chapter 5
Current Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Phase Loss Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Ground Fault Current Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Underload Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Current Imbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Line Undercurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Line Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Line Loss Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Undervoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Voltage Imbalance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Phase Rotation Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Frequency Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Real Power (kW) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Apparent Power (kVA) Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Power Factor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Control Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Commands
Metering and Diagnostics
DeviceLogix™ Functionality
EtherNet/IP Communication
Table of Contents
Thermistor (PTC) Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
DeviceLogix Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Operator Station Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Start Inhibit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Contactor Feedback Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Nonvolatile Storage Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Trip History Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Trip History Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Warning History Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Chapter 8
DeviceLogix Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Node Address Selection Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Assign Network Parameters via the BOOTP/ DHCP Utility 173
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
7
8
Table of Contents
DeviceNet Communication
Firmware and EDS Files
Troubleshooting
Assign Network Parameters Via a Web Browser and
MAC Scanner Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Web Server Security and System Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Permanently Enable the Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
View and Configure Parameters via the Web Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Back up/Restore Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Integration with Logix-based Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Configure an E300 Relay in a Logix Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
E-mail Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Chapter 10
DeviceNet Node Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Setting the Hardware Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Using the Node Commissioning Tool of RSNetWorx for
Produced and Consumed Assembly Configurations . . . . . . . . . 194
Mapping the Scanner to the Scan List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Commissioning the Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
DeviceLogix Interface in RSNetWorx for DeviceNet. . . . . . . . . . . . 199
E3/E3 Plus Overload Emulation Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Chapter 11
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) File Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Download the EDS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Chapter 12
Module Status (MS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Network Status (NS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Trip/Warn LED Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Table of Contents
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
E300 Wiring Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP)
Objects
Appendix B
Identity Object — CLASS CODE 0x0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Message Router — CLASS CODE 0x0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Assembly Object — CLASS CODE 0x0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 2 . . . . . . . . . . 235
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 1 . . . . . . . . . . 244
Instance 144 – Default Consumed Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Instance 198 - Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly . . . . . 244
Instance 199 - All Diagnostics Produced Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 246
Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Discrete Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0008 . . . . . 251
Discrete Output Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0009. . . . 252
Analog Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x000A . . . . . . 253
Parameter Object — CLASS CODE 0x000F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Parameter Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x0010 . . . . . . . . 255
Discrete Output Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x001E . . 256
Control Supervisor Object — CLASS CODE 0x0029. . . . . . . 257
Overload Object — CLASS CODE 0x002c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Base Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004E . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Electrical Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004F . . . . . . . . . 259
Wall Clock Time Object — CLASS CODE 0x008B . . . . . . . . 262
DPI Fault Object — CLASS CODE 0x0097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
DPI Warning Object — CLASS CODE 0x0098. . . . . . . . . . . . 266
MCC Object — CLASS CODE 0x00C2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
9
Table of Contents
Notes:
10
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Summary of Changes
Access Relay Parameters
Preface
This manual describes how to install, configure, operate, and troubleshoot the
E300™ Electronic Overload Relay.
This manual contains new and updated information as indicated in the following table.
Topic
Parameter listing and descriptions
Accessory information
DeviceNet Communications Module setup and configuration
Page
Moved to PDF attachment
Moved to Technical Data, publication 193-TD006
The spreadsheet that is attached to this PDF details the E300 parameters. To access this file, click the Attachments link (the paper clip) and double-click the file.
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
Resource
E300 Electronic Overload Relay Installation Instructions, publication 193-IN080
E300 Electronic Overload Relay Specifications, publication 193-TD006
DeviceLogix System User Manual, publication RA-UM003
Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication ENET-RM002
Logix5000 Controllers Messages Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM012
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1
Product Certifications website, http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/certification/overview.page
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1
Product Certifications website, http://www.ab.com
Description
Provides complete user information for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
Provides complete specifications for the E300 Electronic Overload Relay.
Provides user information for the DeviceLogix system.
Provides information about Ethernet basics.
Provides information on Logix controller message MSG instructions.
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
You can view or download publications at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
.
To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
9
Preface
Notes:
10
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Module Descriptions
Chapter
1
Overview
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay is the newest technology for overload protection. Its modular design, communication options, diagnostic information, simplified wiring, and integration into Logix technology make this the ideal overload for motor control applications in an automation system.
E300 Electronic Overload Relays provide the following benefits:
• Intelligent motor control (EtherNet/IP™ and DeviceNet™ enabled)
• Scalable solution
• Diagnostic Information
• Integrated I/O
• Adjustable trip class 5…30
• Wide current range
• Test/Reset button
• Programmable trip and warning settings
• True RMS current/voltage sensing (50/60 Hz)
• Protection for single- and three-phase motors
The E300 relay consists of three modules: sensing, control and communications. You have choices in each of the three with additional accessories to tailor the electronic overload for your application’s exact needs.
This section gives a brief overview of the E300 modules.
Sensing Module
Sensing Options
• Voltage/current/ground fault
• Current/ground fault
• Current
Current Range [A]
• 0.5…30
• 6…60
• 10…100
• 20…200
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
11
Chapter 1
Overview
Control Voltage
110…120V AC, 50/60 Hz
220…240V AC, 50/60 Hz
24V DC
(1) Includes PTC thermistor and external ground fault.
Inputs
4
4
6
Control Module
I/O
Relay Outputs
3
3
3
Inputs
2
I/O and Protection
(1)
Relay Outputs
2
2
4
2
2
Communication Modules
• EtherNet/IP
• DeviceNet
Expansion Digital I/O
You can add up to four additional expansion digital modules to the E300 relay expansion bus.
• 4 inputs/2 relay outputs
• 24V DC
• 120V AC
• 240V AC
Expansion Analog I/O
You can add up to four additional expansion analog modules to the E300 relay expansion bus.
• 3 universal analog inputs/1 analog output
• 0…10V
• 0…5V
• 1…5V
• 0…20 mA
• 4…20 mA
• RTD (2-wire or 3-wire)
• 0…150
• 0…750
• 0…3000
• 0…6000
(PTC/NTC)
12
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Features
Overview
Chapter 1
Expansion Power Supply
When more than one expansion digital module and one operator station are added to the E300 relay expansion bus, you need an expansion power supply to supplement power for the additional modules. One expansion power supply powers a fully loaded
E300 relay expansion bus.
• 120/240V AC
• 24V DC
Expansion Operator Station
You can add one operator station to the E300 relay expansion bus to be used as a user interface device. The operator stations provide E300 relay status LEDs and function keys for motor control. The operator stations also support CopyCat™, which allows you to upload and download E300 relay configuration parameters. See publication
193-061D for more information about using the CopyCat feature.
• Control station
• Diagnostic station
Thermal Overload
Thermal Utilization
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides overload protection through true RMS current measurement of the individual phase currents of the connected motor. Based on this information, it calculates a thermal model that simulates the actual heating of the motor. Percent of thermal capacity utilization (%TCU) reports this calculated value and is read via a communications network. An overload trip occurs when the value reaches 100%.
Adjustable Settings
Set up thermal overload protection by programming the motor’s full load current
(FLC) rating and the desired trip class (5…30). Programming of the actual values through software programming confirms the accuracy of the protection.
Thermal Memory
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay includes a thermal memory circuit that is designed to approximate the thermal decay for a Trip Class 20 setting. This means that the thermal model of the connected motor is always maintained, even if the supply power is removed.
Reset Modes
This flexibility allows you to select between manual and automatic reset for an overload trip, allowing for broad application. The point of reset is adjustable from
1…100% TCU.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
13
Chapter 1
Overview
14
Time to Trip
During an overload condition, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides an estimated time to trip that is accessible via a communications network. This allows you to take corrective action so that production may continue uninterrupted.
Time to Reset
Following an overload trip, the E300 Electronic Overload Relay does not reset until the calculated percentage of thermal capacity utilization falls below the reset level. As this value decays, the time to reset, which is accessible via a communications network, is reported.
Thermal Warning
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides the capability to alert in the event of an impending overload trip. A thermal warning bit is set in the Current Warning Status when the calculated percentage of thermal capacity utilization exceeds the programmed thermal warning level, which has a setting range of 0…100% TCU.
Two-Speed Protection
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers a second FLA setting for 2-speed motor protection. What used to require two separate overload relays - one for each set of motor windings - is now accomplished with one device. Improved protection is delivered as thermal utilization is maintained in one device during operation in both speeds.
Overtemperature Protection (PTC and RTD)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides motor overtemperature protection with the added provision for monitoring embedded positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistors with the E300 Control Module and resistance temperature detectors
(RTD) with the E300 Analog Expansion Module. When the monitored PTC thermistors or RTD sensors exceed the programmed resistance level, the E300
Electronic Overload Relay can issue a Trip and/or Warning event.
Phase Loss
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers configurable phase loss protection, allowing you to enable or disable the function plus set a time delay setting, adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds. The trip level is factory set at a current imbalance measurement of 100%.
Ground (Earth) Fault
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay incorporates zero sequence (core balance) sensing into its design for low level (arcing) ground fault detection. Trip and warning settings are adjustable from 20 mA…5.0 A. For devices rated greater than 200 A and for ground fault detection less than 0.5 A, the external core balance current transformer accessory is required. Class I and Class II protection are provided as defined by UL1053. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides a max. trip-inhibit
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Overview
Chapter 1
setting, offering flexibility to prevent tripping when the ground fault current magnitude exceeds 6.5 A. This can be useful to guard against the opening of the controller when the fault current could potentially exceed the controller's interrupting capacity rating.
Note:
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay is not a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter for personnel protection (or Class I) as defined in article 100 of the U.S. National
Electric Code.
IMPORTANT
For applications that require ground fault detection and use the passthrough sensing module, this feature is only active when native motor current is present in the pass-through apertures; that is, no external stepdown current transformers (CTs). You must use an external ground fault sensor for any applications that require external step-down CTs.
Stall
“Stall” is defined as a condition where the motor is not able to reach full-speed operation in the appropriate amount of time that is required by the application. This can cause the motor to overheat, because current draw exceeds the motor’s full load current rating. The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides user-adjustable stall protection. The trip setting has a range of 100…600% FLA, and the enable time is adjustable up to 250 seconds.
Jam (Overcurrent)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can respond quickly to take a motor off-line in the event of a mechanical jam, reducing the potential for damage to the motor and the power transmission components. Trip adjustments include a trip setting that is adjustable from 50…600% FLA and a trip delay time with a range of 0.1…25.0 seconds.
A separate warning setting is adjustable from 50…600% FLA.
Underload (Undercurrent)
A sudden drop in motor current can signal conditions such as:
• Pump cavitation
• Tool breakage
• Belt breakage
For these instances, rapid fault detection can help minimize damage and aid in reducing production downtime.
Additionally, monitoring for an underload event can provide enhanced protection for motors that are coded by the medium handled (for example, submersible pumps that pump water). Such motors can become overheated despite being underloaded. This can result from an absence or an insufficient amount of the medium (for example, due to clogged filters or closed valves).
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers underload trip and warning settings adjustable from 10…100% FLA. The trip function also includes a trip delay time with a range of 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
15
Chapter 1
Overview
16
Current Imbalance (Asymmetry)
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay offers current imbalance trip and warning settings adjustable from 10…100%. The trip function also includes a trip delay time with a range of 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Remote Trip
The remote trip function allows an external device (such as a vibration sensor) to induce the E300 Electronic Overload Relay to trip. External device relay contacts are wired to the E300 Electronic Overload Relay discrete inputs. These discrete inputs are configurable with an option for assigning the remote trip function.
Voltage Protection
The E300 sensing module with voltage, current, and ground fault current provides you with enhanced current-based motor protection with the addition of voltage protection. With this option, you can protect against voltage issues (such as undervoltage, voltage imbalance, phase loss, frequency, and phase rotation).
Power Protection
While the motor is powering a load, the E300 sensing module with voltage, current, and ground fault current, also protects the motor based on power. This option monitors and protects for both excessive and low real power (kW), reactive power
(kVAR), apparent power (kVA), and power factor for a specific application (such as pump applications).
Analog Protection
The E300 analog expansion module allows you to protect against over-analog readings from analog-based sensors (such as overtemperature, overflow, or overpressure)
Current Monitoring Functions
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay allows you to monitor the following operational data over a communications network:
• Individual phase currents — in amperes
• Individual phase currents — as a percentage of motor FLC
• Average current — in amperes
• Average current — as a percentage of motor FLC
• Percentage of thermal capacity utilized
• Current imbalance percentage
• Ground fault current
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Overview
Chapter 1
Voltage, Power, and Energy Monitoring
The E300 sensing module with voltage, current, and ground fault current can be included in a company’s energy management system. This option provides voltage, current, power (kW, kVAR, and kVA), energy (kWh, kVARh, kVAh, kW Demand, kVAR Demand, and kVA Demand), and power quality (power factor, frequency, and phase rotation) information down at the motor level.
Diagnostic Functions
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay allows you to monitor the following diagnostic information over a communications network:
• Device status
• Trip status
• Warning status
• Time to an overload trip
• Time to reset after an overload
• History of past five trips
• History of past five warnings
• Hours of operation
• Number of starts
• Trip snapshot trip
Status Indicators
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay provides the following LED indicators:
• Power — This green/red LED indicates the status of the overload relay.
• TRIP/WARN — This LED flashes a yellow code under a warning condition and a red code when tripped.
Inputs/Outputs
Inputs allow the connection of such devices as contactor and disconnect auxiliary contacts, pilot devices, limit switches, and float switches. Input status can be monitored via the network and mapped to a controller’s input image table. Inputs are rated 24V DC, 120V AC, or 240V AC and are current sinking. Power for the inputs is sourced separately with convenient customer sources at terminal A1. Relay contact outputs can be controlled via the network or DeviceLogix function blocks for performing such tasks as contactor operation.
Test/Reset Button
The Test/Reset button, which is located on the front of the E300 Electronic Overload
Relay, allows you to perform the following:
• Test — The trip relay contact opens if the E300 Electronic Overload Relay is in an untripped condition and the Test/Reset button is pressed for 2 seconds or longer.
• Reset — The trip relay contact closes if the E300 Electronic Overload Relay is in a tripped condition, supply voltage is present, and the Test/Reset button is pressed.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
17
Chapter 1
Overview
Modular Design
18
Single/Three-Phase Operation
The E300 Electronic Overload Relay can be applied to three-phase and single-phase applications. A programming parameter is provided for selection between single- and three-phase operation. Straight-through wiring is available in both cases.
EtherNet/IP Communications
The E300 EtherNet/IP communication module has two RJ45 ports that act as an
Ethernet switch to support a star, linear, and ring topology and supports the following:
• 2 concurrent Class 1 connections [1 exclusive owner + (1 input only or 1 listen only)]
• 6 simultaneous Class 3 connections (explicit messaging)
• Embedded web server
• SMTP server for trip and warning events (email and text messaging)
• Embedded EDS file
• RSLogix 5000 add-on profile
DeviceNet Communications
The E300 DeviceNet communication module has one 5-pin DeviceNet connector and supports the following:
• Read and Write of configuration parameters and real-time information via
DeviceNet using RSNetWorx™ at communication rates of 125 kb, 250 kb, and
500 kb
• Communication of 16 bytes of data for I/O (Implicit) Messaging to a
DeviceNet scanner
• Mechanical means to select the node address of the device
• LED status indication for device power, trip/warning status, and communication status
• Same DeviceNet objects as the existing E3 Plus electronic overload relay
• E3 Plus emulation mode that lets you reuse configuration parameters when using tools such as ADR, DeviceNet Configuration Terminal (193-DNCT or
CEP7-DNCT), and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet
You can select the specific options that you need for your motor starter application. the
E300 relay consists of three modules: sensing, control, and communication. You can customize each of the three with accessories to tailor the electronic motor overload for your application’s exact needs.
• Wide current range
• Sensing capabilities (Current, Ground Fault Current, and/or Voltage)
• Expansion I/O
• Operator interfaces
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Communication Options
Diagnostic Information
Simplified Wiring
Sensing Module
Overview
Chapter 1
You can select from multiple communication options that integrate with Logix-based control systems. Developers can easily add the E300 relay to Logix-based control systems that use Integrated Architecture tools like Add-on Profiles, Add-on
Instructions, and Faceplates.
• EtherNet/IP Device Level Ring (DLR)
• DeviceNet
The E300 relay provides a wide variety of diagnostic information to monitor motor performance, proactively alert you to possible motor issues, or identify the reason for an unplanned shutdown. Information includes:
• Voltage, Current, and Energy
• Trip / Warning Histories
• % Thermal Capacity Utilization
• Time to Trip
• Time to Reset
• Operational Hours
• Number of Starts
• Trip Snapshot
The E300 relay provides an easy means to mount to both IEC and NEMA
Allen-Bradley® contactors. A contactor coil adapter is available for the 100-C contactor, which allows you to create a functional motor starter with only two control wires.
Figure 1 - Sensing Module
The sensing module electronically samples data about the current, voltage, power, and energy that are consumed by the electric motor internal to the module. You can choose from one of three varieties of the sensing modules depending on the motor diagnostic information that is needed for the motor protection application:
• Current Sensing
• Current and Ground Fault Current Sensing
• Current, Ground Fault Current, Voltage, and Power Sensing
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
19
Chapter 1
Overview
The current ranges for each of three varieties of sensing module are as follows:
• 0.5…30 A
• 6…60 A
• 10…100 A
• 20…200 A
You can choose how the sensing module mechanically mounts inside the electrical enclosure. The following mounting mechanisms are available for the sensing module.
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 100 IEC Contactor
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 300 NEMA Contactor
• Mount to the load side of an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 500 NEMA Contactor
• DIN Rail / Panel Mount with power terminals
• Replacement DIN Rail / Panel Mount with power terminals for an
Allen-Bradley E3 Plus panel mount adapter
• DIN Rail / Panel Mount with pass-thru power conductors
You can use the E300 relay sensing module with external current transformers. The following application guidelines should be adhered to when using an external CT configuration:
• You must mount the E300 Overload Relay a distance equal to or greater than six times the cable diameter (including insulation) from the nearest currentcarrying conductor.
• For applications that use multiple conductors per phase, the diameter of each cable should be added and multiplied by six to determine the proper placement distance for the E300 Overload Relay.
Control Module
Figure 2 - Control Module
20
The control module is the heart of the E300 relay and can attach to any sensing module. The control module performs all protection and motor control algorithms and contains the native I/O for the system. The control module has two varieties:
• I/O only
• I/O and protection (PTC and External Ground Fault Current Sensing)
The control module is offered in three control voltages:
• 110…120V AC, 50/60Hz
• 220…240V AC, 50/60Hz
• 24V DC
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Overview
Chapter 1
External control voltage is required to power the E300 relay and activate the digital inputs.
Communication Modules
The communication module allows the E300 relay to be integrated into an automation system, and it can attach to any control module. All communication modules allow you to set the node address with rotary turn dials, and it provides diagnostic status indicators to provide system status at the panel.
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module has two RJ45 connectors that function as a switch. You can daisy chain multiple E300 relays with Ethernet cable, and the module supports a Device Level Ring (DLR).
Figure 3 - EtherNet/IP Communication Module
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module has a single 5-pin DeviceNet connector that allows the E300 relay to be integrated into a DeviceNet network.
Figure 4 - DeviceNet Communication Module
Optional Add-On Modules
Optional Expansion I/O
The E300 relay lets you add more digital and analog I/O to the system via the E300 relay Expansion Bus if the native I/O count is not sufficient for the application on the base relay. You can add any combination of up to four Digital I/O Expansion Modules that have four inputs (120V AC, 240V AC, or 24V DC) and two relay outputs.
You can also add up to four Analog I/O Expansion Modules, which have three independent universal analog inputs and one isolated analog output. The Analog I/O
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
21
Chapter 1
Overview
Expansion Modules require Control Module firmware v3.000 or higher. The independent universal analog inputs can accept the following signals:
• 4…20 mA
• 0…20 mA
• 0…10V DC
• 1…5V DC
• 0…5V DC
• RTD Sensors (Pt 385, Pt 3916, Cu 426, Ni 618, Ni 672, and NiFe 518)
• Resistance (150
, 750
, 3000
, and 6000
)
The isolated analog output can be programmed to reference a traditional analog signal
(4…20 mA, 0…20 mA, 0…10V DC, 1…5V, or 0…10V) to represent the following diagnostic values:
• Average %FLA
• %TCU
• Ground Fault Current
• Current Imbalance
• Average L-L Voltage
• Voltage Imbalance
• Total kW
• Total kVAR
• Total kVA
• Total Power Factor
• User-defined Value
Optional Operator Station
Figure 5 - Operator Stations
Control Station Diagnostic Station
Power LED
Trip/Warn LED
Power LED
Trip/Warn LED
Escape
Up
Select
Start Forward/Speed 1
Start Reverse/Speed 2
Local/Remote
LOCA
L
TE
Stop
Reset
0
RESET
ESC
SELEC
T
Start Forward/Speed 1
Start Reverse/Speed 2
Local/Remote
Stop
REMO L
TE
Reset
0
RESET
Enter
Down
The E300 relay lets you add one operator interface to the Expansion Bus. You can choose between two types of operator stations: Control Station or a Diagnostic
Station. Both types of operator stations mount into a standard 22 mm push button knockout, and they provide diagnostic status indicators that allow you to view the status of the E300 relay from the outside of an electrical enclosure. Both operator stations provide push buttons that can be used for motor control logic, and they both can be used to upload and download parameter configuration data from the base relay.
22
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Optional Expansion Bus
Power Supply
Overview
Chapter 1
The Diagnostic Station contains a display and navigation buttons that allows you to view and edit parameters in the base relay. The Diagnostic Station requires Control
Module firmware v3.000 or higher.
The E300 relay expansion bus provides enough current to operate a system that has (1)
Digital Expansion Module and (1) Operator Station. An E300 relay system that contains more expansion modules needs supplemental current for the Expansion Bus. the E300 relay offers you two types of Expansion Bus Power Supplies: AC (110…240V
AC, 50/60 Hz) and DC (24V DC). One Expansion Bus Power Supply supplies enough current for a fully loaded E300 relay Expansion Bus (four Digital Expansion
Modules, four Analog Expansion Modules, and one Operator Station). You can use either Expansion Bus Power Supply with any combination of Digital and Analog
Expansion Modules.
Figure 6 - Expansion Bus Power Supply
Protection Features
The numbers in parentheses in this section represent specific device functions as they relate to the respective protection measures provided. These protection functions correlate to ANSI standard device numbers as defined by ANSI/IEEE C37.2
Standard—Standard for Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers,
Acronyms, and Contact Designations.
Standard Current-based Protection
All versions of the E300 relay provide the following motor protection functions.
• Thermal Overload (51)
• Phase Loss
• Current Imbalance (46)
• Undercurrent – load loss (37)
• Overcurrent – load jam (48)
• Overcurrent – load stall
• Start Inhibit (66)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
23
Chapter 1
Overview
Applications
Ground Fault Current-based Protection
The E300 relay sensing modules and control modules with a ground fault current option provides the following motor protection function:
• Ground Fault – zero sequence method (50 N)
Voltage- and Power-based Protection
The E300 relay sensing modules with voltage sensing provides the following motor protection functions:
• Undervoltage (27)
• Overvoltage (59)
• Phase Reversal (47) – voltage-based
• Over and Under Frequency (81) – voltage-based
• Voltage Imbalance (46)
• Over and Under Power (37)
• Over and Under Leading/Lagging Power Factor (55)
• Over and Under Reactive Power Generated
• Over and Under Reactive Power Consumed
• Over and Under Apparent Power
Thermal-based Protection
The E300 relay provides the following thermal-based motor protection functions:
• Thermistor – PTC (49)
• Stator Protection – RTD (49)
• Bearing Protection – RTD (38)
You can use the E300 relay with the following across the line starter applications:
• Non-reversing starter
• Reversing starter
• Wye (Star) / Delta starter
• Two-speed motors
• Low and medium voltage with two or three potential transformers
• With or without Phase current transformers
• With or without zero-sequence core balanced current transformer
24
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter
2
Diagnostic Station
Navigation Keys
Key
Displaying a Parameter
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay supports a Diagnostic Station on the E300
Expansion Bus (requires Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher). The
Diagnostic Station allows you to view any E300 relay parameter and edit any configuration parameter. This chapter explains the navigation keys on the Diagnostic
Station, how to view a parameter, how to edit a configuration parameter, and the
Diagnostic Station programmable display sequence.
The E300 Diagnostic Station has five navigation keys that are used to navigate through the display menu system and edit configuration parameters.
Description Name
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
• Scroll through the display parameters or groups.
• Increment or decrement values.
Escape
Select
Enter
• Back one step in the navigation menu.
• Cancel a change to a configuration parameter value
• Select the next bit when viewing a bit enumerated parameter.
• Select the next digit when editing a configuration value.
• Select the next bit when editing a bit enumerated parameter.
• Start the navigation menu.
• Advance one step in the navigation menu.
• Display the description for a bit enumerated parameter.
• Edit a configuration parameter value.
• Save the change to the configuration parameter value.
The E300 Diagnostic Station allows you to view parameters by using a group menu system or by a linear list. To start the navigation menu, press the key. The menu prompts you to view parameters by groups, parameters in a linear list, or E300 relay system information.
Parameter Group Navigation
To start the navigation menu, press the the Groups navigation method and press
key. Use the
.
or keys to select
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
25
Chapter 2
Diagnostic Station
26
Use the or keys to select the parameter group to display and press .
Use the or keys to view the parameters that are associated with that group.
When viewing a bit enumerated parameter, press bit. Press to view the next bit. Press
to view the description of each
to return to the parameter.
Press to return to the parameter group navigation system.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout
(Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the programmable display sequence.
Linear List Navigation
To start the navigation menu, press the the Linear List navigation method and press
key. Use the
.
or keys to select
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Diagnostic Station
Chapter 2
Use the press .
or and keys to select the parameter number to display and
Use the or keys to view the next sequential parameter.
When viewing a bit enumerated parameter, press bit. Press to view the next bit. Press
to view the description of each
to return to the parameter.
Press to return to the linear list navigation system.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the programmable display sequence.
System Info
The E300 Diagnostic Station can display firmware revision information, view the time and date of the E300 relay virtual clock, and edit the time and date of the E300 relay virtual clock. To view E300 relay system information, start the navigation menu by pressing key. Use the or keys to select System Info and press .
Use the or keys to view the E300 relay system information.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
27
Chapter 2
Diagnostic Station
To edit the system date or time, press
keys to select the new value. Press
to save the new system values or press restore the previous system values.
to modify the value. Use the or
to select the next system value. Press
to cancel the modification and
Editing Parameters
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Editing a Configuration Parameter
The E300 Diagnostic Station allows you to edit configuration parameters by using a group menu system or by a linear list. To start the navigation menu, press the key.
You are prompted to view parameters by groups, parameters in a linear list, or E300 relay system information. Choose the appropriate method and navigate to the parameter to be modified.
Editing a Numeric Parameter
To edit a configuration parameter, press the
or or press
keys to select the new value. Press
key to modify the value. Use the
to save the new system values
to cancel the modification and restore the previous value.
28
Press to return to the navigation menu.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Diagnostic Station
Chapter 2
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Editing a Bit Enumerated Parameter
When editing a bit enumerated parameter, press the key to view the description of each bit. Use the the next bit. Press
or
to save the new value or press and restore the previous value.
keys to select the new bit value. Press to edit
to cancel the modification
Programmable Display
Sequence
Press to return to the navigation menu.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically cancels the modification, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Display Sequence
The Diagnostic Station of the E300 relay sequentially displays up to seven screens every 5 seconds.
• Three-phase current
• Three-phase voltage
• Total power
• User-defined screen 1
• User-defined screen 2
• User-defined screen 3
• User-defined screen 4
The three-phase voltage and total power screens are only included in the sequence when the E300 relay has a voltage, current, and ground fault current (VIG)-based
Sensing Module.
The user-defined screens allow you to select up to two parameters per screen.
See Diagnostic Station User-defined Screens on page 41 to configure the Screen# and
Parameter# (Parameters 428…435).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
29
Chapter 2
Diagnostic Station
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically cancels any editing modifications, restores the previous value, and returns to its programmable display sequence.
Stopping the Display Sequence
To stop the display sequence, press sequence through the displays. Press
. Use the or keys to manually
to return to the automatic display sequence.
If you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter
436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the programmable display sequence.
Automatic Trip and Warning
Screens
When the E300 relay is in a trip or warning state, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically displays the trip or warning event.
Press any of the navigation keys ( automatic display sequence.
, , , , or ) to return to the
When the trip or warning event clears, the E300 Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the programmable display sequence.
If another parameter is displayed and you do not press any navigation keys for a period that Display Timeout (Parameter 436) defines, the Diagnostic Station automatically returns to the trip or warning screen if the trip or warning event is not cleared.
30
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Device Modes
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter
3
This chapter provides instructions about how to operate and configure an E300™
Electronic Overload Relay system. This chapter includes settings for Device Modes,
Option Match, Security Policy, I/O Assignments, Expansion Bus Fault, Emergency
Start, and an introduction to Operating Modes.
This chapter shows you the parameters required to program the device; see page 9 for
information about the complete parameter spreadsheet that is attached to this PDF.
The E300 relay has five device modes to validate configuration of the device and limit when you can configure the E300 relay, perform a firmware update, and issue commands.
• Administration Mode
• Ready Mode
• Run Mode
• Test Mode
• Invalid Configuration Mode
Administration Mode
Administration Mode is a maintenance mode for the E300 relay that allows you to configure parameters, modify security policies, enable web servers, perform firmware updates, and issue commands.
Follow these steps to enter into Administration Mode:
1. Set the rotary dials on the E300 Communication Module to the following values
– For EtherNet/IP set the rotary dials to 0-0-0
– For DeviceNet set the rotary dials to 7-7
2. Cycle power on the E300 relay
After you complete commissioning activities and maintenance tasks, return the E300 relay back to Ready or Run Mode by setting the rotary dials of the E300 communication module back to its previous positions and then cycle power.
Ready Mode
Ready Mode is a standby mode for the E300 relay in which the relay is ready to help protect an electric motor and no electrical current has been detected. You can modify configuration parameters, update firmware, and issue commands if the appropriate security policies are enabled. The Power LED on the Communication Module and
Operator Stations flash green and bit 14 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) is set to 1 when the device is in Ready Mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
31
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
32
Run Mode
Run Mode is an active mode for the E300 relay in which the relay is sensing electrical current and is actively protecting an electric motor. Only non-motor protection configuration parameters can be modified if the appropriate security policies are enabled. The Power LED on the Communication Module and Operator Stations is solid green and bits 3, 4, and/or 5 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) are set to 1 when the device is in Run Mode.
Test Mode
Test Mode is used by installers of motor control centers who are testing and commissioning motor starters with an automation system. A digital input of the E300 relay is assigned to monitor the Test position of the motor control center enclosure.
The Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) are described later in this chapter.
Anyone who commissions motor starters in an automation system can put their motor control center enclosure into the Test position to activate Test Mode and verify that the digital inputs and relay outputs of the E300 relay are operating properly with the motor starter without energizing power to the motor. If the E300 relay senses current or voltage in Test Mode, it generates a Test Mode Trip.
Invalid Configuration Mode
Invalid Configuration Mode is an active mode for the E300 relay in which the relay is in a tripped state due to invalid configuration data. Invalid Configuration Parameter
(Parameter 38) indicates the parameter number that is causing the fault. Invalid
Configuration Cause (Parameter 39) identifies the reason for Invalid Configuration
Mode.
The Trip/Warn LED on the Communication Module and Operator Stations flashes a pattern of red, 3 long and 8 short blinks, and bits 0 and 2 in Device Status 0 (Parameter
20) are set to 1 when the device is in Invalid Configuration Mode.
To return to Ready/Run Mode, place a valid configuration value in the parameter that is identified by Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) and Invalid
Configuration Cause (Parameter 39). Reset the trip state of the E300 relay by pressing the blue reset button on the Communication Module, via network communication, with the internal web server of the EtherNet/IP communication module, or by an assigned digital input.
Option Match
Due to the modular nature of the E300 relay, you can enable the Option Match feature to verify that the options that you expect for the motor protection application are the ones that are present on the E300 relay system. You can configure an option mismatch to cause a protection trip or provide a warning within the E300 relay.
Enable Option Match Protection Trip (Parameter 186)
To enable the Option Match feature to cause a protection trip in the event of an option mismatch, place a (1) in bit position 8 of Parameter 186 (Control Trip Enable). You can select the specific option match features to cause a protection trip in Parameter 233
(Option Match Action).
Enable Option Match Protection Warning (Parameter 192)
To enable the Option Match feature to cause a warning in the event of an option mismatch, place a (1) in bit position 8 of Parameter 192 (Control Warning Enable).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
You can select the specific option match features to cause a warning in Parameter 233
(Option Match Action).
Control Module Type (Parameter 221)
The E300 relay offers six different control modules. Place the value of the expected control module into Parameter 221. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for the control module.
Sensing Module Type (Parameter 222)
The E300 relay offers 12 different sensing modules. Place the value of the expected sensing module into Parameter 222. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for the sensing module.
Communication Module Type (Parameter 223)
The E300 relay offers two different communication modules. Place the value of the expected communication module into Parameter 223. A value of (0) disables the
Option Match feature for the communication module.
Operator Station Type (Parameter 224)
The E300 relay offers two different types of operator stations. Place the value of the expected operator station into Parameter 224. A value of (0) disables the Option
Match feature for the operator station. A value of (1),
“No Operator Station”
, makes the operator station not allowed on the Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting an operator station to the E300 relay system.
Digital I/O Expansion Modules
Module 1 Type (Parameter 225)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 1 into Parameter 225. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 1 to the E300 relay system.
Module 2 Type (Parameter 226)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 2 into Parameter 226. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 2 to the E300 relay system.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
33
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
34
Module 3 Type (Parameter 227)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 3 into Parameter 227. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 3 to the E300 relay system.
Module 4 Type (Parameter 228)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Digital I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4. There are three different types of Digital I/O expansion modules. Place the value of the expected Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital
Module 4 into Parameter 228. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this
Digital I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Digital I/O Expansion Module ”
, makes the Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4 not allowed on the
Expansion Bus and prevents you from connecting a Digital I/O expansion module set to Digital Module 4 to the E300 relay system.
Analog I/O Expansion Modules
Module 1 Type (Parameter 229)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1 into
Parameter 229. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 1 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 1 to the E300 relay system.
Module 2 Type (Parameter 230)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2 into
Parameter 230. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 2 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 2 to the E300 relay system.
Module 3 Type (Parameter 231)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3 into
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Parameter 231. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 3 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 3 to the E300 relay system.
Module 4 Type (Parameter 232)
The E300 relay supports up to four additional Analog I/O expansion modules. This parameter configures the Option Match feature for the Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4. There is one type of Analog I/O expansion module. Place the value of the expected Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4 into
Parameter 232. A value of (0) disables the Option Match feature for this Analog I/O expansion module. A value of (1),
“No Analog I/O Expansion Module”
, makes the
Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog Module 4 not allowed on the Expansion
Bus and prevents you from connecting an Analog I/O expansion module set to Analog
Module 4 to the E300 relay system.
Option Match Action (Parameter 233)
The Option Match feature for the E300 relay allows you to specify an action when there is an option mismatch—Protection Trip or Warning. Place a (0) in the appropriate bit position for a warning, and place a (1) in the appropriate bit position to cause a protection trip if there is an option mismatch.
Security Policy
Policy Type
Device Configuration
Device Reset
Firmware Update
The E300 relay has a security policy that can be used to prevent anyone with malicious intent to potentially damage a motor or piece of equipment. By default, you can only modify the security policy when the E300 relay is in Administration Mode (see
to learn how to enable Administration Mode).
Table 1 - Security Policy Types
Description
• allows you to send external message instructions via a communication network to write values to configuration parameters
• when this policy is disabled, all external message instructions with configuration data return a communication error when the E300 relay is in Ready
Mode or Run Mode
• allows you to send external message instruction via a communication network to perform a soft device reset when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode
• when this policy is disabled, all external reset message instructions return a communication error when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode or Run Mode
• allows you to update the internal firmware of the communication module and control module via ControlFlash when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode
• when this policy is disabled, firmware updates return a communication error when the E300 relay is in Ready Mode or Run Mode
I/O Assignments
The E300 relay has native digital inputs and relay outputs in the Control Module. This
I/O can be assign to dedicated functions. The following sections list the function assignments for the available Control Module I/O.
Input Assignments
You can assign digital inputs via the following parameters:
• Input Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 196)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
35
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
• Input Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 197)
• Input Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 198)
• Input Pt03 Assignment (Parameter 199)
• Input Pt04 Assignment (Parameter 200)
• Input Pt05 Assignment (Parameter 201)
Output Assignments
You can assign relay outputs via the following parameters:
• Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameter 202)
• Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameter 203)
• Output Pt02 Assignment (Parameter 204)
Output Relay Configuration
States
When assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay, you can configure the E300 relay's output relays to go to a specific safe state when one of following events occur:
• Protection Fault Mode - when a trip event occurs
• Communication Fault Mode - when network communication is lost or an error occurs
• Communication Idle Mode - when a network scanner changes to Idle mode or a
PLC changes to Program mode
IMPORTANT
It is important that you fully understand the use of these parameters and the order of their priority under the conditions of a protection trip, communication fault, and communication idle event.
The default setting for these three modes is to Open/de-energize all E300 output relays that are assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip
Relay.
The E300 output relay states when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or
Control/Control & Trip Relay follow this priority order:
Table 2 - Output Relay Priority
Priority
1
2
3
4
Normal/General Purpose Relay
Output Protection Fault State
Output Communication Fault State
Output Final Fault State
Output Communication Idle State
Control/Control & Trip Relay
Output Communication Fault State
Output Final Fault State
Output Communication Idle State
The optional eight output relays on the digital expansion I/O modules operate as a
Normal/General Purpose relay with the same E300 relay safe state settings. There are two relays per module with maximum of four modules.
36
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Output Relay Protection Fault Modes
When the E300 relay has a trip event, you can configure the E300 output relays to go to a specific state (Open or Closed) or ignore the trip event and continue to operate as
normal. The parameters that are listed in Table 3
configure the Protection Fault Mode for each E300 output relay.
Table 3 - Protection Fault Mode Parameters
Fault Name
Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Action
Output Relay 0 Protection Fault Value
Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Action
Output Relay 1 Protection Fault Value
Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Action
Output Relay 2 Protection Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Protection Fault Value
Parameter
No.
Description
304
• defines how Output Relay 0 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay responds when a trip event occurs
305 • defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when a trip event occurs
310
322
• defines how Output Relay 1 responds when a trip event occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay
311 • defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when a trip event occurs
316
• defines how Output Relay 2 responds when a trip event occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay.
317 • defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when a trip event occurs
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a trip event occurs
323 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
328
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when a trip event occurs
329 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
334
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a trip event occurs
335 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
340
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a trip event occurs
341 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a trip event occurs
Output Relay Communication Fault Modes
When the E300 relay loses communication, experiences a communication bus fault, or has a duplicate node address, you can configure the E300 output relays with the
Communication Fault Mode parameters to go to a specific state (Open or Closed) or hold the last state.
An E300 relay with firmware revision v5.000 or higher supports the Fault Mode
Output State Duration feature, which can be used with redundant network scanners or control systems. The Fault Mode Output State Duration is the time that the E300 output relays can go to a temporary state (Open, Closed, or Hold Last State) when a communication fault occurs. Configure this temporary state by using the
Communication Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter 561), the
E300 output relays go to a final fault state (Open or Closed), which you configure by using the Final Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter 561), the
E300 output relays resume with the state commanded by the network scanner or control system.
The parameters that are listed in Table 4 configure the Configuration Fault Mode for
each E300 output relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
37
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Table 4 - Configuration Fault Mode Parameters
Fault Name
Fault Mode Output State Duration
Output Relay 0 Final Fault Value
Output Relay 1 Final Fault Value
Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Value
Output Relay 2 Final Fault Value
(1)
Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Action
Output Relay 0 Communication Fault Value
Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Action
Output Relay 1 Communication Fault Value
Output Relay 2 Communication Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Final Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Final Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Final Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Action
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Fault Value
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Final Fault Value
Parameter
No.
Description
561
• defines the amount of time (s) that the E300 relay remains in the Communication Fault
Mode state when a communication fault occurs. 0 = forever
• If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time the E300 output relays go to the final fault state (configured by using Final Fault Mode Parameters
306
• defines how Output Relay 0 responds when a communication fault occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay
307 • defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when a communication fault occurs
562
312
• defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
• defines how Output Relay 1 responds when a communication fault occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay
313 • defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when a communication fault occurs
563
• defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
317
• defines how Output Relay 2 responds when a communication fault occurs when this parameter is assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/Control & Trip Relay
319 • defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when a communication fault occurs
564
324
• defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a communication fault occurs
325 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
565
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
330
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when a communication fault occurs
331 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
566
336
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a communication fault occurs
337 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
567
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
342
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a communication fault occurs
343 • defines which state both output relays should go to when a communication fault occurs
568
• defines which state both output relays should go to when communication is not restored with the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
(1) Available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher.
Output Relay Communication Idle Modes
When a network scanner goes into Idle mode or a PLC goes into Program mode while communicating with an E300 relay, you can configure the E300 output relays to go to a specific state (Open or Close) or hold the last state. The parameters that are listed in
Table 5 configure the Communication Idle Mode for each E300 output relay.
38
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Fault Name
Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Action
Output Relay 0 Communication Idle Value
Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Action
Output Relay 1 Communication Idle Value
Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Action
Output Relay 2 Communication Idle Value
Table 5 - Communication Idle Mode Parameters
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Action
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output Relay Communication Idle Value
Parameter
No.
308
309
314
315
320
321
326
327
332
333
338
339
344
345
Description
• defines how Output Relay 0 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a programmable logic controller (PLC) goes into Program Mode
• defines which state Output Relay 0 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how Output Relay 1 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state Output Relay 1 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how Output Relay 2 when assigned as a Normal/General Purpose Relay or Control/
Control & Trip Relay responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state Output Relay 2 should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 1 responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 2 responds when network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 3 responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines how both output relays on Digital Expansion Module 4 responds when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
• defines which state both output relays should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle
Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode
Expansion Bus Fault
The expansion bus of the E300 relay can be used to expand the I/O capabilities of the device with the addition of digital and analog expansion I/O modules. The Expansion
Bus Fault allows you to have the E300 relay go into a Trip or Warning state when established Expansion Bus communication is disrupted between the Control Module and any digital and analog expansion I/O modules.
The Expansion Bus Fault is used when the Option Match feature is not enabled for the digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules. The Expansion Bus Fault only monitors for communication disruptions between the Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules. Expansion bus communication disruptions between the Control Module and Operator Station do not affect the Expansion Bus fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
39
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Table 6 - Expansion Bus Fault Functions
Function
Name
Expansion Bus
Trip
How to
Enable
Set Control
Trip Enable bit 10 to 1
Expansion Bus
Warning
Set Control
Warning
Enable bit
10 to 1
Setting
Parameter No.
186
192
Description
• When communication is disrupted between the Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules, the E300 relay goes into a tripped state
• When communication is disrupted between the Control Module and digital and/or analog expansion I/O modules, the E300 relay goes into a warning state
Trip/Warn Module
Blink Pattern
• Red 3 long and 11 short
• Yellow 3 long and
11 short
To Return to Ready/Run Mode:
• Verify that the expansion bus cables are properly plugged into the Bus In and Bus Out ports of all expansion modules
• When all expansion I/O modules’ status LEDs are solid green, reset the trip state of the E300 relay by pressing the blue reset button on the Communication Module, via network communication, with the internal web server of the EtherNet/IP communication module, or by an assigned digital input
• Verify that the expansion bus cables are properly plugged into the Bus In and Bus Out ports of all expansion modules
• When all expansion I/O modules’ status LEDs are solid green, the warning state of the E300 relay automatically clears
Emergency Start
40
In an emergency, it may be necessary to start a motor even if a protection fault or a communication fault exists. The trip condition may be the result of a thermal overload condition or the number of starts exceeded its configuration. These conditions can be overridden using the Emergency Start feature of the E300 relay.
IMPORTANT
Activating Emergency Start inhibits overload and blocked start protection.
Running in this mode can cause equipment overheating and fire.
To enable the Emergency Start feature in the E300 relay, set the Emergency Start
Enable (Parameter 216) to Enable.
Table 7 - Emergency Start (Parameter 216)
Value
0
1
Description
Disable
Enable
Configure one of the Ptxx Input Assignments (Parameters 196…201) to Emergency
Start and activate the corresponding digital input.
Table 8 - Emergency Start Input PTXX Assignment (Parameters 196…201)
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
Assignment
Normal
Trip Reset
Remote Trip
Activate FLA2
Force Snapshot
Emergency Start
Description
Function as a digital input
Reset the E300 relay when it is in a tripped state
Force the E300 relay to go into a tripped state
Use the value in FLA2 Setting (Parameter 177) for the current-based protection algorithms
Force the E300 relay to update its Snapshot log
Issue an Emergency Start command
You can also use a network command to activate the Emergency Start feature. For the
EtherNet/IP communication module, you would set the Emergency Start bit to 1 in
Output Assembly 144. See Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects on page 227
for more information on EtherNet/IP communication.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
When the Emergency Start feature is active, the following actions occur in the E300 relay:
• Protection trips are ignored
• Output relays configured as Trip Relays are put into closed state
• Normal operation resumes with any Normal or Control Relay assigned output relay
• The Emergency Start Active bit is set to 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) bit 6
Language
The E300 relay with firmware v5.000 and higher supports multiple languages for its
Diagnostic Station and web server. Parameter text is displayed in the selected language.
Language (Parameter 212) displays the E300 relay parameter text is displayed in the selected language.
Diagnostic Station Userdefined Screens
The Diagnostic Station has four user-defined screens that are part of the its display sequence, in which you can define up to two parameters per screen.
Table 9 - User-defined Screen Parameters
Name
User-defined Screen 1 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 1 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 2 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 2 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 3 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 3 – Parameter 2
User-defined Screen 4 – Parameter 1
User-defined Screen 4 – Parameter 2
Parameter
No.
Description
(1)
428 • the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 1
429 • the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 1
430 • he E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 2
431 • the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 2
432 • the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 3
433 • the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 3
434 • the E300 parameter number to display for the first parameter in user-defined screen 4
435 • the E300 parameter number to display for the second parameter in user-defined screen 4
(1) You can select one of the 560 available E300 relay parameters.
Display Timeout
Display Timeout (Parameter 436) defines the time duration in which there is no display navigation activity, and the E300 Diagnostic Station returns to its normal display sequence. Any configuration parameters that were left in an edit state are canceled. A value of zero disables the display timeout function.
Analog I/O Expansion
Modules
The E300 relay supports up to four Analog I/O Expansion Modules on the E300
Expansion Bus. The E300 Analog Expansion Module has three independent universal inputs and one analog output.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
41
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Analog Input Channels
The universal analog inputs can accept the following analog signals:
• Current
– 4…20 mA
– 0…20 mA
• Voltage
– 0…10V DC
– 1…5V DC
– 0…5V DC
• 2-Wire or 3-Wire RTD Sensors
– 100 Ω, 200 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt 385
– 100 Ω, 200 Ω, 500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt 3916
– 10 Ω Cu 426
– 100 Ω Ni 618
– 120 Ω Ni 672
– 604 Ω NiFe 518
• Resistance
– 0…150 Ω
– 0…750 Ω
– 0…3000 Ω
– 0…6000 Ω (PTC and NTC Sensors)
The analog inputs can report data in four different formats. Table 10
display the data ranges for all available analog input types for the four available data formats.
Table 10 - Analog Input Data Format for Current Input Type
Input
Range
4…20 mA
0…20 mA
Input Value Condition
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
4.00 mA
3.00 mA
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.00 mA
0.00 mA
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
Engineering
Units
21000
20000
4000
3000
21000
20000
0
0
Engineering
Units x 10
2100
2000
400
300
2100
2000
0
0
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
PID
17407
16383
0
-1024
17202
16383
0
0
42
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Table 11 - Analog Input Data Format for Voltage Input Type
Input
Range
0…10 V DC
1…5 V DC
0…5V DC
Input Value Condition
10.50V DC
10.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
1.00V DC
0.50V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
Engineering
Units
10500
10000
0
0
5250
5000
1000
500
5250
5000
0
0
Engineering
Units x 10
1050
1000
0
0
525
500
0
0
100
50
525
500
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
Table 12 - Analog Input Data Format for RTD Input Type
Input Range Input Value Condition
RTD
100 Ω, 200 Ω,
500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt
385
RTD
100 Ω, 200 Ω,
500 Ω, 1000 Ω Pt
3916
RTD
10 Ω Cu 426
-328.0 °F
630.0 °C
630.0 °C
-200.0 °C
-200.0 °C
1166.0 °F
1166.0 °F
-328.0 °F
850.0 °C
850.0 °C
-200.0 °C
-200.0 °C
1562.0 °F
1562.0 °F
-328.0 °F
-328.0 °F
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
1166
-328
-328
260
260
-100
-100
500
500
-148
-148
Engineering
Units x 10
850
850
-200
-200
1562
630
-200
-200
1166
1562
-328
-328
630
11660
-3280
-3280
2600
2600
-1000
-1000
5000
5000
-1480
-1480
Engineering
Units
8500
8500
-2000
-2000
15620
15620
-3280
-3280
6300
6300
-2000
-2000
11660
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
PID
17202
16383
0
0
17407
16383
0
-2048
17202
16383
0
0
PID
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
43
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
44
Input Range Input Value Condition
RTD
100 Ω Ni 618
RTD
120 Ω Ni 672
RTD
100 Ω NiFe 518
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-80.0 °C
-80.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-112.0 °F
-112.0 °F
260.0 °C
260.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
500.0 °F
500.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
200.0 °C
200.0 °C
-100.0 °C
-100.0 °C
392.0 °F
392.0 °F
-148.0 °F
-148.0 °F
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
-80
-80
500
500
-148
-148
260
260
Engineering
Units x 10
260
260
-100
-100
500
500
-100
-100
392
392
-112
-112
200
200
-148
-148
-1480
-1480
2600
2600
-800
-800
5000
5000
Engineering
Units
2600
2600
-1000
-1000
5000
5000
-1120
-1120
2000
2000
-1000
-1000
3920
3920
-1480
-1480
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
Table 13 - Analog Input Data Format for Resistance Input Type
Input Range Input Value Condition
Resistance
0…50 Ω
Resistance
0…750 Ω
Resistance
0…3000 Ω
Resistance
0…6000 Ω
(PTC / NTC)
3000.0 Ω
3000.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
6000 Ω
6000 Ω
0 Ω
0 Ω
150.00 Ω
150.00 Ω
0.00 Ω
0.00 Ω
750.0 Ω
750.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
0.0 Ω
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
0
0
30000
30000
0
0
6000
6000
0
0
Engineering
Units
15000
15000
0
0
7500
7500
600
600
0
0
0
0
3000
3000
0
0
Engineering
Units x 10
1500
1500
750
750
0
0
Raw /
Proportional
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
32767
32767
-32768
-32768
PID
The performance for the input channels of the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module is dependent on the filter setting for each channel. The total scan time for the input channels of the module is determined by adding the conversion time for all enabled input channels.
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
PID
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
16383
16383
0
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Table 14 - Analog Input Channel Conversion Time
Current, Voltage,
2-Wire RTD, Resistance
3-Wire RTD
Input Type Filter Frequency
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
17 Hz
4 Hz
62 Hz
470 Hz
Conversion Time
153 ms
512 ms
65 ms
37 ms
306 ms
1024 ms
130 ms
74 ms
Example:
• Channel 00 is configured for a 3-wire RTD and 4 Hz filter (conversion time =
1024 ms).
• Channel 01 is configured for 17 Hz voltage (conversion time = 153 ms).
• Channel 02 is configured for 62 Hz current (conversion time = 65 ms).
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module input channel scan time is 1242 ms
(1024+153+65).
Analog Output Channel
The isolated analog output can be programmed to provide one of the following analog output signal types:
• Current
– 4…20 mA
– 0…20 mA
• Voltage
– 0…10V DC
– 1…5V DC
– 0…5V DC
The analog outputs can report data as a percent of range.
the data ranges for all available analog output types.
Table 15 - Analog Output Data Format for Current Output Type
Output Range
4…20 mA
0…20 mA
Output Signal
21.000 mA
20.000 mA
4.000 mA
3.000 mA
21.00 mA
20.00 mA
0.00 mA
0.00 mA
Condition
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
% Range
106.25%
100.00%
0.00%
-6.25%
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
45
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Table 16 - Analog Output Data Format for Voltage Output Type
Output Range
0…10 V DC
1…5 V DC
0…5 V DC
Output Value
10.50V DC
10.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
1.00V DC
0.50V DC
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
0.00V DC
0.00V DC
Condition
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
High Limit
High Range
Low Range
Low Limit
% Range
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
106.25%
100.00%
0.00%
-6.25%
105.00%
100.00%
0.00%
0.00%
The analog output can be used to communicate E300 diagnostic information via an analog signal to distributed control systems, programmable logic controllers, or panelmounted analog meters. The analog output can represent one of the following E300 diagnostic parameters:
• Average %FLA
• %TCU
• Ground Fault Current
• Current Imbalance
• Average L-L Voltage
• Voltage Imbalance
• Total kW
• Total kVAR
• Total kVA
• Total Power Factor
• User-defined Value
46
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Table 17 - Analog Output Selection Type
Output Selection
Average % FLA
Scaled Average % FLA
% TCU
Ground Fault Current
Internal, 0.50…5.00 A
External, 0.02…0.10 A
External, 0.10…0.50 A
External, 0.20…1.00 A
External, 1.00…5.00 A
Current Imbalance
Average L-L Voltage
Voltage Imbalance
Total kW
Total kVAR
Total kVA
Total Power Factor
User-defined Value
Low Range
0%
0%
0%
0.50 A
0.02 A
0.10 A
0.20 A
1.00 A
0%
0V
0%
0 kW
5.25V DC
5.00V DC
-50% (Lagging)
-32768
High Range
100%
200%
100%
5.00 A
0.10 A
0.50 A
1.00 A
5.00 A
100%
(PT Primary) V
100%
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
(FLA1 x PT Primary x 1.732) V
+50% (Leading)
32767
The E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module output channel update rate is 10 ms.
Analog Modules
Table 18 - Analog Module 1 Channel Descriptions
Name
Input Channel 00 Type
Input Channel 00 Format
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 01 Type
Input Channel 01 Format
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 02 Type
Input Channel 02 Format
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Output Channel 00 Type
Output Channel 00 Selection
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Parameter
No.
Description
437 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 1 monitors
438 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
439 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
440 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
441 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
442 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
446 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 1 monitors
447 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
448 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
449 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
450
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
451 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
455 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 1 monitors
456 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
457 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
458 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
459
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
460 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
464 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 1 provides
465 • defines the E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
466 • defines the value that Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E300 Expansion Bus fault
467 • defines the value that Output Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
47
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Table 19 - Analog Module 2 Descriptions
Name
Input Channel 00 Type
Input Channel 00 Format
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 01 Type
Input Channel 01 Format
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 02 Type
Input Channel 02 Format
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Output Channel 00 Type
Output Channel 00 Selection
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Parameter
No.
Description
468 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 2 monitors
469 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
470 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
471 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
472 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
473 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
477 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 2 monitors
478 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
479 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
480 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
481
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
482 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
486 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 2 monitors
487 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
488 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
489 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
490
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
491 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
464 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 2 provides
496 • defines the E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
497
498
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E300
Expansion Bus fault
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
48
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
Table 20 - Analog Module 3 Channel Descriptions
Name
Input Channel 00 Type
Input Channel 00 Format
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 01 Type
Input Channel 01 Format
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 02 Type
Input Channel 02 Format
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Output Channel 00 Type
Output Channel 00 Selection
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Parameter
No.
Description
499 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 3 monitors
500 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
501 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
502 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
503 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
504 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
508 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 3 monitors
509 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
510 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
511 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
512
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
513 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
517 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 3 monitors
518 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
519 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
520 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
521
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
522 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
526 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 3 provides
527 • defines the E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
528
529
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E300
Expansion Bus fault
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
49
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Table 21 - Analog Module 4 Channel Descriptions
Name
Input Channel 00 Type
Input Channel 00 Format
Input Channel 00 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 00 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 00 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 00 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 01 Type
Input Channel 01 Format
Input Channel 01 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 01 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 01 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 01 RTD Type Enable
Input Channel 02 Type
Input Channel 02 Format
Input Channel 02 Temperature Unit
Input Channel 02 Filter Frequency
Input Channel 02 Open Circuit State
Input Channel 02 RTD Type Enable
Output Channel 00 Type
Output Channel 00 Selection
Output Channel 00 Expansion Bus Fault Action
Output Channel 00 Protection Fault Action
Parameter
No.
Description
530 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 00 of Analog Module 4 monitors
531 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
532 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
533 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
534 • defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
(1)
535 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
539 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 01 of Analog Module 4 monitors
540 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
541 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
542 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
543
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
544 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
548 • defines the type of analog signal that Input Channel 02 of Analog Module 4 monitors
549 • defines the data format for how the analog reading is reported
550 • defines the temperature unit for RTD sensor readings
551 • defines update rate for the input channels of the analog module
552
• defines what the input channel reports when the input channel has an open circuit
556 • defines the type of RTD to monitor when the input channel type is configured to scan an RTD sensor
557 • defines the type of analog signal that Output Channel 00 of Analog Module 4 provides
558 • defines the E300 relay parameter that Output Channel 00 represents
559
560
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when there is an E300
Expansion Bus fault
• defines the value that the E300 Analog I/O Expansion Module Output Channel 00 provides when the E300 is in a tripped state
(1) Open circuit detection is always enabled for this input channel.
Network Start Configuration
States
An E300 relay with firmware v5.000 and higher provides two start command bits in
Output Assembly 144 (NetworkStart1/O.LogicDefinedPt00Data and
NetworkStart2/O.LogicDefinedPt01Data) that is issued by a network scanner or control system and used by a Networked based Operating Mode (Parameter 195) to start and stop a motor through a communication network command. These networked based start commands can be configured to go to a specific state when one of following events occur:
•
Communication Fault Mode
– when network communication is lost or an error occurs
•
Communication Idle Mode
– when a network scanner changes to Idle mode or a PLC changes to Program mode
IMPORTANT
It is important that you fully understand the use of these parameters and the order of their priority under the conditions of a communication fault and communication idle event.
50
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
System Operation and Configuration
Chapter 3
The default setting for these modes is to issue a Stop command when a Networked based Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is configured. The Network Start
Configuration States follow this priority order:
1. Network Start Communication Fault State
2. Network Start Final Fault State
3. Network Start Communication Idle State
Network Start Communication Fault Modes
When the E300 relay with firmware revision v5.000 or higher loses communication, experiences a communication bus fault, or has a duplicate node address, you can configure the E300 Network Start commands with the Network Start
Communication Fault Mode parameters to go to a specific state (Stop or Start) or hold the last state.
An E300 relay with firmware revision v5.000 or higher supports the Fault Mode
Output State Duration feature, which can be used with redundant network scanners or control systems. The Fault Mode Output State Duration is the time that the E300
Network Start commands can go to a temporary state (Stop, Start, or Hold Last State) when a communication fault occurs. Configure this temporary state by using the
Network Start Communication Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter 561), the
E300 Network Start commands go to a final fault state (Stop or Start) which you configure using the Final Fault Mode parameters.
If communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is restored within the Fault Mode Output State Duration time (Parameter 561), the
E300 Network Start commands resume with the state commanded by the network scanner or control system.
The parameters that are listed in Table 22
configure the Network Start Configuration
Fault Mode for both Network Start commands.
Table 22 - Network Start Configuration Fault Mode Parameters
Name
Fault Mode Output State Duration
Network Start Communication Fault Action
Network Start Communication Fault Value
Network Start Final Fault Value
(1)
(1) Available in E300 relay firmware v5.000 and higher.
Parameter
No.
Description
561
573
• defines the amount of time in seconds that the E300 remains in the Network Start Communication Fault Mode state when a communication fault occurs. 0 = forever
• if communication between the E300 relay and a network scanner or control system is not restored within the
Fault Mode Output State Duration time, the E300 Network Start command goes to the final fault state, which is configured using the Network Start Final Fault Mode parameters
569 • defines how the Network Start commands respond when a communication fault occurs
570 • defines which state the Network Start command should go to when a communication fault occurs
• defines which state the Network Start command should go to when communication is not restored within the time defined in Fault Mode Output State Duration (Parameter 561)
Network Start Communication Idle Modes
When a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a PLC goes into Program Mode while communicating with an E300 relay, you can configure the E300 Network Start commands to go to a specific state (Open or Close) or hold the last state. The
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
51
Chapter 3
System Operation and Configuration
Name
Network Start Communication Idle Action
Network Start Communication Idle Value
parameters that are listed in Table 23 configure the Network Start Communication
Idle Mode for the Network Start commands.
Table 23 - Network Start Communication Idle Mode Parameters
Parameter
No.
571
572
Description
• defines how the Network Start commands respond when a network scanner goes into Idle mode or a PLC goes into Program mode
• defines which state the Network Start commands should go to when a network scanner goes into Idle Mode or a
PLC goes into Program Mode
Introduction to Operating
Modes
The E300 relay supports a number of Operating Modes, which consist of configuration rules and logic to control typical full-voltage motor starters, including:
• Overload
• Non-Reversing Starter
• Reversing Starter
• Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) Starter
• Two-Speed Starter
• Monitor
The default Operating Mode (Parameter 195) for the E300 relay is Overload
(Network) in which the E300 relay operates like a traditional overload relay in which one of the output relays is assigned as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. You can use network commands to control any output relays that are assigned as Normal output relays or Control Relays. For Control Module firmware v1.000 and v2.000, one output relay must be assigned as a Trip Relay. For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, one output relay must be configured as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. Invalid configuration of the output relays causes the E300 relay to go into Invalid
Configuration Mode and trip on a configuration trip.
describes the functionality of the available Operating Modes for the E300 relay and their associated configuration rules.
52
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter
4
Operating Modes
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay supports up to 54 operating modes, which consist of configuration rules and logic to control typical full-voltage motor starters, including:
• Overload
• Non-reversing starter
• Reversing starter
• Wye/Delta (Star/Delta) starter
• Two-speed starter
• Monitoring device
This chapter explains the configuration rules, logic, and control wiring that is required for the available operating modes. The default Operating Mode (Parameter 195 or
Drop-down menu using the E300 Add-on Profile in Studio 5000™) for the E300 relay is Overload (Network), where the E300 relay operates like a traditional overload relay in which one of the output relays is assigned as a Trip Relay or Control Relay. You can use network commands to control any output relays that are assigned as Normal output relays or Control Relays. For Control Module firmware v1.000 and v2.000, one output relay must be assigned as a Trip Relay. For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, one output relay must be configured as a Trip Relay or Control Relay.
Invalid configuration of the output relays causes the E300 relay to go into Invalid
Configuration Mode and trip on a configuration trip.
Overload Operating Modes
The overload-based operating modes of the E300 relay make the E300 operate as a traditional overload relay, in which it interrupts the control circuit of a contactor coil with a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. There are four overload-based operating modes to choose from:
• Network
• Operator Station
• Local I/O
• Custom
The E300 relay is wired as a traditional overload relay with one of the output relays
configured as a normally closed trip relay. Figure 7 is a wiring diagram of a non-
reversing starter. Relay 0 is configured as a trip relay, and Relay 1 is configured as a normally open control relay, which receives commands from an automation controller to energize the contactor coil.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
53
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
54
Figure 7 - Trip Relay Wiring Diagram
R13
Relay 1
R14 A1
Motor
A2
Relay 0 configured as a trip relay
(1)
R03 R04
(1) Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, you can also wire the E300 relay as a control relay so that the relay that is controlled by the communication network opens
when a trip event occurs. Figure 8
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with
Relay 0 configured as a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 8 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 0 configured as a control relay
(1)
R03 R04
A1
Motor
A2
(1) Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
Figure 9 - Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
Trip Reset
Overload (Network)
The E300 relay’s default Operating Mode (Parameter 195 = 2) is
Overload (Network)
, in which the E300 operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. You can use network commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are assigned as normal output relays.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. For Control Module firmware v1.000 and v2.000, one output relay must be assigned as a trip relay. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters
202…204) to Trip Relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
2. For Control Module firmware v3.000 and higher, one output relay must be assigned as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments
(Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
DeviceLogix™ Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 2
Overload (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Overload (Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 26) operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload (Operator
Station) operating mode is used when an automation controller uses the start and stop keys of the E300 Operator Station for its motor control logic. You can use network commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are assigned as normal output relays.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. One output relay must be assigned as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the
Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control
Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 26.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
55
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
56
Overload (Local I/O)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Overload (Local I/O)
(Parameter 195 = 35) operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload (Local I/O) operating mode is used for standalone applications or automation systems that do not use an
E300 Operator Station. You can use the digital inputs of the E300 for the motor control logic of an automation controller. The automation controller can use network commands to control the control relay or any of the remaining output relays that are assigned as Normal output relays. The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is disabled, and a digital input that is assigned as a trip reset is required.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. One output relay must be assigned as a trip relay or control relay. Set any of the
Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control
Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 35.
Overload (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Overload (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 49) operates as a traditional overload relay with one output relay that is assigned as a normally closed trip relay or a normally open control relay. The Overload (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Non-reversing Starter
Operating Modes
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
2. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Trip Relay or Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 49.
The non-reversing starter-based operating modes of the E300 relay provide the control logic for a non-reversing full voltage starter. A normally open control relay controls the contactor coil. When a trip event occurs, the control relay remains open until the E300 receives a trip reset command. There are 15 non-reversing starter-based operating modes to choose from:
• Network
• Network with Feedback
• Operator Station
• Operator Station with Feedback
• Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Three-wire Control
• Network & Operator Station
• Network & Operator Station with Feedback
• Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O with Feedback – Three-wire Control
• Custom
Non-reversing Starter (Network)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network)
(Parameter 195 =
3) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay , the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
57
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
58
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 10 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 3.
Timing Diagram
Figure 11 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 4) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly
144 to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
The auxiliary contact from the contactor of the non-reversing starter is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary wired to Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 12 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
IN 0
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 4.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
59
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Feedback
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timing Diagram
Figure 13 - Non-reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Normal Operation Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
60
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Operating Station)
(Parameter 195 = 27) uses the Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the nonreversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” button. The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay, and it opens when a trip
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output
Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 14 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I-Run 0-Stop
Relay 0
Trip
Trip Reset
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 27.
Timing Diagram
Figure 15 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Start
Stop
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
61
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with
Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 28) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” button. The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The auxiliary contact from the contactor of the non-reversing starter is wired into
Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback
Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
8. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary wired to Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
62
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Figure 16 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
IN 0
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I-Run
0-Stop
Feedback IN 0
Relay 0
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Start
Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 28.
Timing Diagram
Figure 17 - Non-reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire
Control
(Parameter 195 = 36) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when Input 0 is active.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
63
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 to control the starter. When an E300 relay powers up, the starter energizes if Input 0 is active.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the state of Input 0 and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 18 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run/Stop
IN 0
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 36.
64
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 19 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire
Control with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 37) uses the state of Input 1 to control Output
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the nonreversing starter remains energized when Input 1 is active.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback operating mode uses the state of Input 1 to control the starter. When the E300 relay powers up, the starter energizes if Input 1 is active.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the state if Input 1 and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 20 is a
wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
65
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
66
Figure 20 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
Run/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
Relay 0
Feedback
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 37.
Timing Diagram
Figure 21 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Timing
Diagram
Normal Operation Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Run/Stop
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire
Control
(Parameter 195 = 38) uses an active state in Input 1 (normally open momentary push button) to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil, and a de-active state in Input 0 is used (normally closed push button) to deenergize Output Relay 0. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are momentary values, so the nonreversing starter only energizes if Input 0 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is energized when Input 0 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active. Output Relay 0 de-
energizes when Input 0 is momentarily de-active or when a trip event occurs. Figure 22
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with three wire control and an Output
Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 22 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Stop
Run
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
Start
Stop
Relay 0
Trip
Trip Reset
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 38.
Timing Diagram
Figure 23 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
67
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
68
Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with
Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire
Control with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 39) uses an active state in Input 1 (normally open momentary push button) to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil, and a de-active state in Input 2 is used (normally closed momentary push button) to de-energize Output Relay 0. Both Input 1 and Input 2 are momentary values, so the non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is
controlled by the state if Input 1 and opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 24 is a
wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with three wire control and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 24 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with Feedback Wiring
Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
Run
Stop
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on powerup or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 39.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Run
Feedback IN 0
Relay 0
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 25 - Non-reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control with Feedback Timing
Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Start
Stop
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 11) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output
Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
The E300 Operator Station’s “I”, “0”, and “Local/Remote” keys are momentary push buttons. Press and release the “I” button in Local control mode to energize the starter.
Press and release the “0” button in Local control mode to de-energize the starter.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
69
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
70
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 26 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I-Run 0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 11.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 12) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in
Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
The E300 Operator Station’s “I”, “0”, and “Local/Remote” keys are momentary push buttons. Press and release the “I” button in Local control mode to energize the starter.
Press and release the “0” button in Local control mode to de-energize the starter.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
5. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
6. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
71
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
72
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with the contactor auxiliary wired into Input 0 and Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 27 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
IN 0
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
I-Run 0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 12.
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two
Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 16) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in
Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 0 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 1 determines if the motor starter is in Remote or Local control mode. LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network
Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569
– 573) described in
In Local control mode, the state of Input 0 controls Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 0 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when Input 0 is active.
Input 1 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 1 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 1 to select Local control mode.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
4. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
5. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 28 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run/Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 16.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
73
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
74
Timing Diagram
Figure 29 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback –
Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with
Feedback – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 17) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 3 determines whether the motor starter is in Remote or Local control mode.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, the state of Input 2 controls Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. Input 2 is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when Input 2 is active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 30 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two-wire Control
Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
IN 0
Run/Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 2
IN 3
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 17.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
75
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
76
Feedback
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timing Diagram
Figure 31 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Two-wire Control
Timing Diagram
Normal Operation
Trip Event
Feedback Timeout
Run/Stop
Relay 0
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
– Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 18) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 1
& Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button that is wired to
Input 1 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. A normally closed momentary push button that is wired to Input 2 is used to de-energize Output
Relay 0. The non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 32 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 18.
Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Threewire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station) with Feedback – Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 19) uses the network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 in Remote control mode and Input 1
& Input 2 in Local control mode to control Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil.
LogicDefinedPt00Data is a maintained value, so the non-reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data has a value of 1 in Remote control mode. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost in Remote control mode by using the Network Communication Fault and Network
Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button that is wired to
Input 1 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. A normally closed momentary push button that is wired to Input 2 is used to de-energize Output
Relay 0. The non-reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
77
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
78
The auxiliary contact from the non-reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Non-reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay in which the relay is controlled by the communication network and opens when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Output Relay 0 configured as a control relay.
Figure 33 - Non-reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) with Feedback – Three-wire Control
Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Aux
Run
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
E300 Relay
R03
Relay 0
R04
Run
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 19.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Non-reversing Starter (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Non-Reversing Starter (Custom)
(Parameter 195 =
50) operates as a non-reversing starter one output relay that is assigned as a normally open control relay. The Non-reversing Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Control
Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay can also be wired as a control relay so that the relay that is controlled by
the communication network opens when a trip event occurs. Figure 34
is a wiring diagram of a non-reversing starter with Relay 0 configured as a control relay. Relay 0 receives control commands from an automation controller to energize or de-energize the contactor coil. Relay 0 also goes to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 34 - Control Relay Wiring Diagram
Relay 0 configured as a control relay
(1)
R03 R04
A1
Motor
A2
(1) Contact shown with supply voltage applied.
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 50.
Timing Diagram
Figure 35 - Non-reversing Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
Trip Reset
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
79
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Reversing Starter Operating
Modes
The non-reversing starter-based operating modes of the E300 relay provide the control logic for a reversing full voltage starter. Two normally open control relays control the forward and reverse contactor coils. When a trip event occurs, both control relays remain open until the E300 receives a trip reset command. There are 11 reversing starter-based operating modes to choose from:
• Network
• Network with Feedback
• Operator Station
• Operator Station with Feedback
• Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Network & Operator Station
• Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Custom
Reversing Starter (Network)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network)
(Parameter 195 = 5) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication between an automation controller and the E300 relay is restored, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
80
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor in which both relays are controlled by the communication network and open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 36 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 36 - Reversing Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Forward
Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 5.
Timing Diagram
Figure 37 - Reversing Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 6) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly
144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
81
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
82
maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network
Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569
– 573) described in
.
The auxiliary contact from the forward contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the reversing contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor in which both relays are controlled by the communication network and open when a trip event occurs.
Figure 38 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and
Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 38 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward Feedback IN 0
Reverse Feedback IN 1
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 6.
Timing Diagram
Figure 39 - Reversing Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Reversing Starter (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Operating Station)
(Parameter
195 = 29) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key to control Output Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button. The “0” button must be pressed before changing to another direction. The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
83
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
• Option Match Trip must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor, and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 40 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 40 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 29.
84
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Forward
Stop
Timing Diagram
Figure 41 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 30) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” button.The “0” button must be pressed before changing to another direction. The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The auxiliary contact from the reversing starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
85
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
9. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 42 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 42 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
IN 0
IN 1
R03
R13
E300 Relay
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 30.
86
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward Feedback
Reverse Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Forward
Stop
Timing Diagram
Figure 43 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 40) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or
Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before changing to another direction
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 relay powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
87
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 44 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 44 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
Forward
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 40.
Timing Diagram
Figure 45 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Trip Status
Trip Reset
88
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 41) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or
Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before changing to another direction.
The auxiliary contact from the starter’s forward contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the starter’s reversing contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 relay powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the forward contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the reversing contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 46 is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
89
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
90
Figure 46 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Forward Feedback
Reverse Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Run Forward Aux
Run Reverse Aux
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
R03
R13
E300 Relay
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Forward
Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 41.
Timing Diagram
Figure 47 - Reversing Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 42) uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output Relay 1, which controls
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
the reversing contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used to deenergize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input
0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 2 must be momentarily de-active before changing to another direction.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with three wire control and Output
Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 48 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
IN 2
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 42.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
91
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
92
Timing Diagram
Figure 49 - Reversing Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Forward
Stop
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 13) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and
LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1.
You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key is used to control Output
Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output Relay
1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the reversing starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button. The “0” button must be pressed before changing to another direction.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or E300 Operator
Station, and both output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 50 is a wiring
diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 50 - Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
93
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
94
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 13.
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 20) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and
LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1.
You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
In Local control mode, Input 0 is used to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the forward contactor, and Input 1 is used to control Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the reversing contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the reversing starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active. Both Input 0 and Input 1 must be in a de-active state before changing to another direction.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the
E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0 & Input 1.
Both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Figure 51 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward/Stop
Run Reverse/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 3
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 20.
Timing Diagram
Figure 52 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Forward
Reverse
Forward (Relay 0)
Reverse (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 21) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control
Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and
LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the reversing starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1.
You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters
(Parameters 569 – 573) described in Chapter 3
.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
95
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the forward contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output Relay 1, which controls the reversing contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used to deenergize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the reversing starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and Input
0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 2 must be momentarily de-active before changing to another direction.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Reversing Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter.
When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0, Input 1, and
Input 2. Both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
96
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Figure 53 - Reversing Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Forward
Run Reverse
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
IN 2
IN 3
R03
Relay 0
R13
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 21.
Reversing Starter (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Reversing Starter (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 51) operates as a reversing starter with two output relays that are assigned as normally open control relays. The Reversing Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Set two of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Control
Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
is a wiring diagram of a reversing starter with Output Relay 0 and Output
Relay 1 configured as control relays. Both Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 go to an open state when there is a trip event.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
97
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Figure 54 - Reversing Starter (Custom) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Forward
Run Reverse
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 50.
Timing Diagram
Figure 55 - Reversing Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
Trip Reset
Two-speed Starter Operating
Modes
The two-speed starter-based operating modes of the E300 relay provide the control logic for a two-speed full-voltage starter. Two normally open control relays control the high-speed and low-speed contactor coils. When a trip event occurs, both control relays remain open until the E300 receives a trip reset command. There are 11 twospeed starter-based operating modes to choose from:
• Network
• Network with Feedback
• Operator Station
• Operator Station with Feedback
• Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O with Feedback – Two-wire Control
• Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Network & Operator Station
• Network & Local I/O – Two-wire Control
• Network & Local I/O – Three-wire Control
• Custom
98
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Two-speed Starter (Network)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network)
(Parameter 195 = 9) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output
Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. In this configuration, both relays are controlled by the communication network and open
when a trip event occurs. Figure 56 is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 56 - Two-speed Starter (Network) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
99
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
100
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 9.
Timing Diagram
Figure 57 - Two-speed Starter (Network) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 10) uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly
144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when
LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network
Communication Fault and Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569
.
The auxiliary contact from the high-speed contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the low-speed contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout (Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. In this configuration, both relays are controlled by the communication network and open
when a trip event occurs. Figure 58 is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 58 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 10.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
101
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Timing Diagram
Figure 59 - Two-speed Starter (Network) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Operating Station)
(Parameter
195 = 33) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key to control Output Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize Output Relay
0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the two-speed starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
102
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor, and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 60
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 60 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
I-Run Fast
II-Run Slow
0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 33.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
103
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
104
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timing Diagram
Figure 61 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run Fast
Stop
Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback
(Parameter 195 = 34) uses the E300 Operator Station’s “I” and “0” keys to control
Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the two-speed starter remains energized when you release the “I” button. The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The auxiliary contact from the two-speed starter’s contactor is wired into Input 0. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E300 Operator Station’s Reset button is enabled, and the Local/Remote yellow
LED is illuminated to indicate that the operator station is being used for local control.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC (Parameter
192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type (Parameter
224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
9. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 62
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
Figure 62 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
IN 0
IN 1
R03
R13
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R04
Relay 1
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 34.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
105
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
106
Run Fast
Stop
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
Timing Diagram
Figure 63 - Two-speed Starter (Operator Station) with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 46) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the high-speed contactor, and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 relay powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
5. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
6. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 64
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 64 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 46.
Timing Diagram
Figure 65 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
107
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 47) uses Input 0 to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the high-speed contactor and Input 1 to control Output Relay 1, which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor. Both Input 0 and Input 1 are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
The auxiliary contact from the starter’s high-speed contactor is wired into Input 0, and the auxiliary contact from the starter’s low-speed contactor is wired into Input 1. If a feedback signal is not received before the time identified in Feedback Timeout
(Parameter 213), then the E300 relay issues a trip or warning event.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control operating mode uses the signal from Input 0 or Input 1 to control the starter. When an E300 relay powers up, the starter energizes if either Input 0 or Input 1 is active.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Feedback Timeout Trip in TripEnableC (Parameter 186) or Feedback Timeout
Warning in WarningEnableC (Parameter 192) must be enabled.
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 is wired as a control relay to the high-speed contactor and Output Relay 1 is wired as a control relay to the low-speed contactor. Both relays
open when a trip event occurs. Figure 66 is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter
with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays and the contactor auxiliary contacts wired to Input 0 and Input 1.
108
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Figure 66 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast Aux
Run Slow Aux
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
IN 2
IN 3
R03
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
Relay 0
R13
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
Run Fast
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Fast Feedback
Slow Feedback
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Timer
Feedback Timeout
Trip
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 47.
Timing Diagram
Figure 67 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Two-wire Control with Feedback Timing Diagram
Trip Event Feedback Timeout
Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three Wire Control
(Parameter 195 = 48) uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
109
Chapter 4
Operating Modes are momentary signals, so the two-speed starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and
Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with three-wire control and
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 68 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast
Run Slow
Stop
IN 0
IN 1
IN 2
E300 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 48.
110
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Run Fast
Stop
Timing Diagram
Figure 69 - Two-speed Starter (Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run Slow
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 15) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
In Local control mode, the E300 Operator Station’s “I” key is used to control Output
Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. The “II” key controls Output
Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. The “0” key is used to de-energize
Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. These keys are momentary push buttons, so the two-speed starter remains energized when you release the “I” or “II” button.
To change between Local and Remote control mode press and release the “Local/
Remote” button on the E300 Operator Station. The LED above “Local/Remote” button illuminates yellow in Local control mode and red in Remote control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The E300 relay issues a trip or warning event if the E300 Operator Station disconnects from the base relay.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
111
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
to control the starter. When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or LogicDefinedPt01Data is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
3. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
5. Operator Station Trip must be disabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186).
6. Operator Station Option Match Trip or Warning must be enabled.
• Option Match Trip or must be enabled in TripEnableC (Parameter 186)
• Operator Station must be enabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
Or
• Option Match Warning must be enabled in WarningEnableC
(Parameter 192)
• Operator Station must be disabled in Mismatch Action (Parameter 233)
• An operator station must be selected in Operator Station Type
(Parameter 224)
7. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
8. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or E300 Operator
Station, and both output relays open when a trip event occurs. Figure 70 is a wiring
diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
112
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Figure 70 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
R03
R13
E300 Relay
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
I-Run Forward
II-Run Reverse
0-Stop
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 15.
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 24) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
In Local control mode, Input 0 is used to control Output Relay 0, which controls the contactor coil of the high-speed contactor, and Input 1 is used to control Output Relay
1, which controls the contactor coil of the low-speed contactor. Both Input 0 and Input
1 are maintained signals, so the two-speed starter remains energized when either Input
0 or Input 1 is active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter.
When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
113
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Three digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0 & Input 1.
Both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a
Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 71 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast/Stop
Run Slow/Stop
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 3
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 24.
114
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Fast (Relay 0)
Slow (Relay 1)
Trip Status
Trip Reset
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Timing Diagram
Figure 72 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Two-wire Control Timing Diagram
Trip Event
Run Fast
Run Slow
Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Network& Operator Station)
(Parameter 195 = 25) in Remote control mode uses network tags
LogicDefinedPt00Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil, and
LogicDefinedPt01Data
in Output Assembly 144 to control Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. Both
LogicDefinedPt00Data and LogicDefinedPt01Data are maintained values, so the two-speed starter remains energized when LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data has a value of 1. You can program the appropriate state of the starter when communication is lost using the Network Communication Fault and
Network Communication Idle parameters (Parameters 569 – 573) described in
Local control mode uses a normally open momentary push button in Input 0 to energize Output Relay 0, which controls the high-speed contactor coil. A normally open momentary push button in Input 1 is used to energize Output Relay 1, which controls the low-speed contactor coil. A normally closed push button in Input 2 is used to de-energize Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1. Both Input 0, Input 1, and Input 2 are momentary signals, so the two-speed starter only energizes if Input 2 is active and
Input 0 or Input 1 is momentarily active.
Input 3 is used to select between Local and Remote control mode. Activate Input 3 to select Remote control mode. De-activate Input 3 to select Local control mode.
InterlockDelay (Parameter 215) defines the minimum time delay when switching direction.
The reset button of the E300 Operator Station is enabled for this operating mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
115
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
116
IMPORTANT
The Two-speed Starter (Network & Operator Station) operating mode uses the value in network tag
LogicDefinedPt00Data
or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
to control the starter.
When communication is restored between an automation controller and the E300 relay, the starter energizes if the value in LogicDefinedPt00Data or
LogicDefinedPt01Data
is set to 1.
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Four digital inputs must be available on the Control Module
3. Output Pt00 Assignment (Parameters 202) must be set to Control Relay.
4. Output Pt01 Assignment (Parameters 203) must be set to Control Relay.
5. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
6. Communication Fault & Idle Override (Parameter 346) must be enabled.
7. Network Fault Override (Parameter 347) must be enabled.
Wiring Diagram
The E300 relay’s Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 are wired as a control relays in which the relay is controlled by the communication network or Input 0, Input 1, and
Input 2. Both output relays open when a trip event occurs.
is a wiring diagram of a two-speed starter with Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 configured as control relays.
Figure 73 - Two-speed Starter (Network & Local I/O) – Three-wire Control Wiring Diagram
Control Power
Run Fast
Run Slow
Stop
Local Inputs/
Controller
IN 0
IN 1
E300 Relay
IN 2
IN 3
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The DeviceLogix program is automatically loaded and enabled in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 25.
Two-Speed Starter (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Two Speed Starter (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 53) operates as a two-speed starter with two output relays that are assigned as normally open control relays. The Two-speed Starter (Custom) operating mode is used for applications that want customized DeviceLogix programs. This operating mode requires minimal configuration rules.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Operating Modes
Chapter 4
Rules
1. Available for Control Module firmware v5.000 and higher.
2. Set two of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters 202…204) to Control
Relay.
3. Overload Trip must be enabled in TripEnableI (Parameter 183).
Wiring Diagram
is a wiring diagram of a Two-speed Starter with Output Relay 0 and Output
Relay 1 configured as control relays. Both Output Relay 0 and Output Relay 1 go to an open state when there is a trip event.
Figure 74 - Two-Speed Starter (Custom) Wiring Diagram
Control Power
E300 Relay
R03
R13
Relay 0
Relay 1
R04
R14
Run Fast
Run Slow
DeviceLogix Program
The last saved DeviceLogix program is executed in the E300 relay on power-up or when Operating Mode (Parameter 195) is set to a value of 53.
Timing Diagram
Figure 75 - Two-Speed Starter (Custom) Timing Diagram
Trip Relay
Device Status 0
Trip Preset
Trip Reset
Monitor Operating Mode
The E300 relay’s monitor-based operating mode allows you to disable all protection features of the E300 relay. You can use the E300 relay as a monitoring device to report current, voltage, power, and energy information.
There is one monitor based operating mode – Custom.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
117
Chapter 4
Operating Modes
Monitor (Custom)
The E300 relay’s Operating Mode
Monitor (Custom)
(Parameter 195 = 54) allows you to use the E300 relay as a monitoring device. No configuration rules apply in this operating mode if all motor protection features are disabled.
Rules
1. If any protection trip events are enabled (excluding Configuration, NVS, and
Hardware Fault trip), then set any of the Output Ptxx Assignments (Parameters
202…204) to the appropriate value of Trip Relay, Control Relay, Monitor Lx
Trip Relay, or Monitor Lx Control Relay.
Wiring Diagram
Not Applicable
118
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter
5
Current Protection
This chapter provides detailed information about the protective trip and warning functions of the E300 Electronic Overload Relay. The protective trip and warning functions are organized into five sections:
•
Current-based
•
Voltage-based
•
Power-based
•
Control-based
•
Analog-based
This chapter explains the trip and warning protection features of the E300 relay and the associated configuration parameters.
The E300 relay digitally monitors the electrical current that is consumed by an electric motor. This electric current information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
•
Overload Trip/Warning
•
Phase Loss Trip
•
Ground Fault Trip/Warning
•
Stall Trip
•
Jam Trip/Warning
•
Underload Trip/Warning
•
Current Imbalance Trip/Warning
•
Line Under Current Trip/Warning
•
Line Over Current Trip/Warning
•
Line Loss Trip/Warning
Current Trip Enable (Parameter 183) and Current Warning Enable (Parameter 189) are used to enable the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) and Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) are used to monitor the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Current Trip
The E300 relay trips with an current-based indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Overload trip protection is enabled
•
Current is present
•
% Thermal Capacity Utilized reaches 100%
If the E300 relay trips, the:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
119
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
120
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 5-short blink pattern
•
Bit 4 in Current Trip Status (Parameter 4) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Current Warning
The E300 relay indicates an current-based warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Overload warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
% Thermal Capacity Utilized is equal to or greater than the warning level
When the overload warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a yellow short-1 blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Current Warning Status (Parameter 10) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as warning alarm close
Overload Protection
The E300 relay provides overload protection through true RMS current measurements of the individual phase currents of the connected motor. Based on the highest current measured, the programmed FLA Setting, and Trip Class, a thermal model that simulates the actual heating of the motor is calculated. Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Number
Overload Trip
Full Load Amps Setting
Trip Class
Automatic/Manual Reset
Overload Warning
Overload Warning Level
Time to Trip
Time to Reset
Nonvolatile Thermal Memory
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
.
(Parameter 1) reports this calculated value and can be read via the communication network
Parameter Number Description
4
20
171
Indicate a trip
Define the motor’s full-load current rating.
177
172
173
Define the high-speed FLA value in two-speed motor applications. Activating FLA2 is described in
Trip Class is the second of two parameters that affect the E300 relay’s thermal capacity utilization algorithm. Trip class is defined as the maximum time (in seconds) for an overload trip to occur when the motor’s operating current is six times its rated current. The E300 relay offers an adjustable trip class range of 5…30. Enter the application trip class into Trip Class (Parameter 172).
Select the reset mode for the E300 relay after an overload or thermistor (PTC) trip. If an overload trip occurs and automatic reset mode is selected, the E300 relay automatically resets when the value stored in % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) falls below the value stored in Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174). If manual reset mode is selected, the E300 Overload Relay can be manually reset after the % Thermal Capacity Utilized is less than the OL Reset Level.
10
20
175
Indicate a warning
2
174
1
Define an alert for an impending overload trip and is adjustable from 0…100% TCU.
When the measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E300 relay, Overload Time to Trip
(Parameter 2) indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs. When the measured current is below the trip rating, the Overload Time to Trip value is reported as 9,999 seconds.
After an overload trip, the E300 relay reports the time remaining until the device can be reset through
Overload Time to Reset (Parameter 3). When the % Thermal Capacity Utilized value falls to or below the
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174), the Overload Time to Reset value indicates zero until the overload trip is reset. After an overload trip is reset, the Overload Time to Reset value is reported as 0 seconds.
The E300 relay includes a nonvolatile circuit to provide thermal memory. The time constant of the circuit corresponds to a Trip Class 20 setting. During normal operation, the thermal memory circuit is continuously monitored and updated to accurately reflect the thermal capacity utilization of the connected motor. If power is removed, the thermal memory of the circuit decays at a rate equivalent to the cooling of a Trip Class 20 application. When the power is re-applied, the E300 relay checks the thermal memory circuit voltage to determine the initial value of % Thermal Capacity Utilized
(Parameter 1).
Full Load Current Guidelines
USA and Canada Guidelines
•
Motor Service Factor ≥ 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating of 1.15 or greater, program the FLA setting to the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
•
Motor Service Factor < 1.15: For motors with a service factor rating less than 1.15, program the FLA setting to 90% of the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
•
Wye-Delta (Y-∆) Applications: Follow the application’s service factor instructions, except divide the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate by
1.73.
Outside USA and Canada Guidelines
•
Maximum Continuous Rated (MCR) Motors: Program the FLA setting to the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate.
•
Star-Delta (Y-∆) Applications: Follow the MCR instructions, except divide the full-load current rating on the printed nameplate by 1.73.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
121
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
122
Trip Curves
The following figures illustrate the E300 relay’s time-current characteristics for trip classes
5, 10, 20, and 30.
Figure 76 - Time-Current Characteristics for Trip Classes 5, 10, 20, and 30
Trip Class 10
1000
Trip Class 5
1000
Cold Trip
Hot Trip
100
100
10
10
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
Trip Class 20
10000
1000
1000%
1
100%
10000
Current (% FLA)
Trip Class 30
1000%
1000
100
100
10
10
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
1000%
1
100%
Current (% FLA)
1000%
For trip class time-current characteristics other than 5, 10, 20, or 30, scale the Class 10 trip time according to the following table:
Table 24 - Time-Current Characteristic Scaling Factors
Trip Class
11
12
9
10
13
7
8
5
6
1.1
1.2
1.3
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
0.5
0.6
Trip Class
20
21
18
19
22
16
17
14
15
2.0
2.1
2.2
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
1.4
1.5
Trip Class
27
28
29
30
25
26
23
24
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Trip Class 10
Multiplier
2.3
2.4
2.9
3.0
Automatic/Manual Reset Times
Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174) is adjustable from 1 to 100% TCU. The following figures illustrate the typical overload reset time delay when Overload Reset Level is set to
75% TCU.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Phase Loss Trip
Phase Loss Inhibit Time
Phase Loss Trip Delay
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Figure 77 - Overload Reset Times
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
Time to Reset in Seconds
100
70
60
90
80
50
0
Trip Class 5
100 200 300
Time to Reset in Seconds
400 500
Trip Class 10 Trip Class 20 Trip Class 30
ATTENTION:
In explosive environment applications, Overload Reset Mode
(Parameter 173) must be set to Manual.
ATTENTION:
In an explosive environment application, Overload Reset Level
(Parameter 174) must be set as low as possible or in accordance with the motor thermal time constant.
Phase Loss Protection
A high current imbalance, or phase failure, can be caused by defective contacts in a contactor or circuit breaker, loose terminals, blown fuses, sliced wires, or faults in the motor. When a phase failure exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise or excessive mechanical vibration. This may result in a degradation of the motor insulation or increased stress on the motor bearings. Rapid phase loss detection helps to minimize the potential damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip
239
240
Inhibit a phase loss trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 seconds.
IMPORTANT
The phase loss inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a phase loss condition until the Phase Loss Inhibit Time expires.
Define the time period for which a phase loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
123
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Ground Fault Trip
Ground Fault Type‘
Ground Fault Maximum Inhibit
124
Ground Fault Current Protection
In isolated or high impedance-grounded systems, core-balanced current sensors are typically used to detect low-level ground faults caused by insulation breakdowns or entry of foreign objects. Detection of such ground faults can be used to interrupt the system to prevent further damage or to alert the appropriate personnel to perform timely maintenance.
The E300 relay provides core-balanced ground fault current detection capability, with the option of enabling Ground Fault Trip, Ground Fault Warning, or both. The ground fault detection method and range depends upon the catalog number of the E300 Sensing
Module and Control Module ordered.
Table 25 - Ground Fault Capabilities
Catalog Number Ground Fault Method
Ground Fault Trip/Warning
Range
193-ESM-IG-__-__
592-ESM-IG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-EIOGP-22-___
193-EIOGP-42-___
Internal
External
(1)
(1) You must use one of the following Catalog Number 193-CBCT_ Core Balance Ground Fault Sensors :
0.5…5.0 A
0.02…5.0 A
1 — Ø 20 mm window
2 — Ø 40 mm window
3 — Ø 65 mm window
4 — Ø 85 mm window
ATTENTION:
The E300 relay is not a ground fault circuit interrupter for personnel protection (or Class I) as defined in Article 100 of the NEC.
ATTENTION:
The E300 relay is not intended to signal a disconnecting means to open the faulted current. A disconnecting device must be capable of interrupting the maximum available fault current of the system on which it is used.
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip
241
248
Select the internal option or the external option with the appropriate measurement range.
Inhibits a ground fault trip from occurring when the ground fault current exceeds the maximum range of the core-balance sensor (approximately 6.5 A).
Ground faults can quickly rise from low-level arcing levels to short circuit magnitudes. A motor starting contactor may not have the necessary rating to interrupt a high magnitude ground fault. In these circumstances it is desirable for an upstream circuit breaker with the proper rating to interrupt the ground fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Ground Fault Filter
Ground Fault Inhibit Time
Ground Fault Trip Delay
Ground Fault Trip Level
Ground Fault Warning
Ground Fault Warning Level
Ground Fault Warning Delay
Parameter Name
Stall Trip
Stall Enabled Time
Stall Trip Level
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Number Description
131
An E300 relay can filter ground fault currents for High Resistance Grounded (HRG) systems from its current-based protection trip and warning functions, which include:
•
Thermal overload
•
Current imbalance
•
Jam
•
Stall
242
243
The Ground Fault Filter is useful for smaller-sized motors that trip unexpectedly due to a controlled ground fault current that is significant relative to the current draw of the electric motor.
This filter only disables the effects of the ground fault current from the current-based motor protection trip and warning functions. Current-based diagnostic data is reported unfiltered when this feature is enabled.
Inhibit a ground fault trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 seconds. The ground fault inhibit time begins when the Current Present (bit 3) or Ground Fault Current Present (bit 4) is set in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20).
Define the time period a ground fault condition must be present before a trip occurs and is adjustable from 0.0…25.0 s.
Ground Fault Trip Level (Parameter 244) allows you to define the ground fault current in which the E300 relay trips and is adjustable from:
•
0.500…5.00 A (Internal)
•
0.020…5.00 A (External)
244
IMPORTANT
The ground fault inhibit timer starts after the maximum phase load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA rating of the device or the ground fault current is greater than or equal to 50% of the minimum ground fault current rating of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a ground fault condition until the Ground Fault Current Inhibit Time expires.
10
20
Indicate a warning
246
245
Define the ground fault current at which the E300 relay indicates a warning and is adjustable from
0.20…5.00 A.
Define the time period (adjustable from 0.0…25.0 s) for which a ground fault condition must be present before a warning occurs.
Stall Protection
A motor stalls when its inrush current lasts for a longer than normal period of time during its starting sequence. As a result, the motor heats up rapidly and reaches the temperature limit of its insulation. Rapid stall detection during the starting sequence can extend the motor’s life, and minimize potential damage and loss of production. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Stall Trip function and stop the motor before damage and loss of production can occur.
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip
249
250
Adjust the time the E300 relay monitors for a stall condition during the motor starting sequence and is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the locked rotor current and is adjustable from 100…600% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
Stall Protection is only enabled during the motor starting sequence. If the maximum phase of load current falls below the programmed Stall Trip Level before the Stall Enabled Time elapses, the E300 relay disables Stall Protection until the next motor starting sequence.
IMPORTANT
The E300 relay considers a motor to have begun its starting sequence if the maximum phase of motor current transitions from 0A to approximately 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
125
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Jam Trip
Jam Inhibit Time
Jam Trip Delay
Jam Trip Level
Jam Warning
Jam Warn Level
Jam Protection
A motor goes into a jam condition when a running motor begins to consume current greater than50% of the motor’s nameplate rating. An example of this condition could be an overloaded conveyor or jammed gear. These conditions can result in the overheating of the motor and equipment damage. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Jam Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid jam fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip
251
252
253
Inhibit a jam trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 s.
Define the time period a jam condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
Define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a jam. It is user-adjustable from 50…600% of the
FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Jam Inhibitor timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum fla SETTING of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a jam condition until the Jam Inhibit Time expires.
10
20
Indicate a warning
254
Define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 50…600% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Jam Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Jam Inhibit Time has expired, the Jam Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name
Underload Trip
Underload Inhibit Time
Underload Trip Delay
Underload Protection
Motor current less than a specific level may indicate a mechanical malfunction in the installation, such as a torn conveyor belt, damaged fan blade, broken shaft, or worn tool.
Such conditions may not harm the motor, but they can lead to loss of production. Rapid underload fault detection helps to minimize damage and loss of production.
The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Underload Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid underload fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip
255
256
Inhibit an underload trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the time period an underload condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 s.
126
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Underload Trip Level
Underload Warning
Underload Warning Level
Parameter Name
Current Imbalance Trip
Current Imbalance Inhibit Time
Current Imbalance Trip Delay
Current Imbalance Trip Level
Current Imbalance Warning
Current Imbalance Warning Level
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Number Description
257
Define the current at which the E300 relay trips on an underload. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Underload Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum fla SETTING of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an underload condition until the Underload Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT
For any given application, the practical limit of the Underload Trip Level (Parameter 246) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the E300 relay’s current measurement capability.
10
20
Indicate a warning
258
Define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Underload Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Underload Inhibit Time has expired, the Underload Warning indication is instantaneous.
Current Imbalance Protection
A current imbalance can be caused by an imbalance in the voltage supply, unequal motor winding impedance, or long and varying wire lengths. When a current imbalance exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction of life expectancy. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Current Imbalance Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid current imbalance fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Current Imbalance can be defined by the following equation:
%CI = 100% * (I d where
/I a
)
I
I
%CI = Percent Current Imbalance d
= Maximum Deviation from the Average Current a
= Average Current
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip
259
260
261
Inhibit a current imbalance trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 s.
Define the time period a current imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 s.
Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261) allows you to define the percentage at which the E300 relay trips on a current imbalance. It is user-adjustable from 10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Current Imbalance Inhibit Timer starts after a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a current imbalance condition until the Current Imbalance Inhibit Time expires.
10
20
Indicate a warning
262
Define the percentage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Current Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Current
Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired, the Current Imbalance Warning indication is instantaneous.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
127
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Under Current Trip
Under Current Inhibit Time
L1 Under Current Trip Delay
L2 Under Current Trip Delay
L3 Under Current Trip Delay
L1 Under Current Trip Level
L2 Under Current Trip Level
L3 Under Current Trip Level
Under Current Warning
L1 Under Current Warning Level
L2 Under Current Warning Level
L3 Under Current Warning Level
Line Undercurrent Protection
For non-motor applications, if the measured current is less than a specific level for a specific phase, it may indicate an electrical malfunction, such as bad resistive heater element or non-operating incandescent light bulb. Such conditions may not harm the power system, but it can lead to loss of production or certification noncompliance.
The E300 relay can monitor for an undercurrent condition per phase with its Line Under
Current Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid under current in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicate a trip for L1, L2, or L3
265
Inhibit an L1, L2, or L3 Under Current trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence.
It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
266
269
272
Define the time period an L1 Under Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
267
270
273
Define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a L1 Under Current. It is user-adjustable from
10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Under Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to
30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an undercurrent condition until the Under Current Inhibit Time expires.
IMPORTANT
For any given application, the practical limit of the L1 Under Current Trip Level (Parameter 267) is dependent on the FLA Setting and the lower limit of the E300 relay’s current measurement capability
10
20
Indicate a warning
268
271
274
Define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a L1 Under Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Under Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under Current
Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Under Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name
Over Current Inhibit Time
Over Current Trip
L1 Over Current Trip Delay
L2 Over Current Trip Delay
L3 Over Current Trip Delay
Line Overcurrent Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is greater than a specific level for a specific phase may indicate an electrical malfunction, such as bad resistive heater element. Such conditions could harm the power system over time, which could lead to loss of production.
The E300 relay can monitor for an overcurrent condition per phase with its Line Over
Current Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid over current in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
275
Over Current Inhibit Time (Parameter 275) allows you to inhibit an L1, L2, and L3 Over Current trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
4
20
276
279
282
Indicates a trip forL1, L2, or L3
Define the time period an L1 Over Current condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
128
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
L1 Over Current Trip Level
L2 Over Current Trip Level
L3 Over Current Trip Level
Over Current Warning
L1 Over Current Warning Level
L2 Over Current Warning Level
L3 Over Current Warning Level
Parameter Name
Line Loss Trip
Line Loss Inhibit Time
L1 Line Loss Trip Delay
L2 Line Loss Trip Delay
L3 Line Loss Trip Delay
Line Loss Warning
Voltage Protection
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Number Description
277
280
283
Define the current at which the E300 relay trips on a L1 Over Current. It is user-adjustable from
10…100% of the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The Over Current Inhibit Timer starts after the maximum phase of load current transitions from 0 A to
30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an overcurrent condition until the Over Current Inhibit Time expires.
10
20
Indicate a warning
278
281
284
Define the current at which the E300 relay indicates a L1 Over Current warning. It is user-adjustable from 10…100% for the FLA Setting (Parameter 171).
IMPORTANT
The L1 Over Current Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Current
Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Over Current Warning indication is instantaneous.
Line Loss Protection
For non-motor applications when the measured current is 0 amps a specific phase, this may indicate an electrical malfunction such as bad resistive heater element or non-operating incandescent light bulb. Such conditions may not harm the power system, but it can lead to loss of production or certification noncompliance.
The E300 relay can monitor for a current-based line loss per phase with its Line Loss Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid line loss in a specific phase to minimize damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
4
20
Indicates a trip for L1, L2, or L3
285
286
287
288
4
20
Inhibit an L1, L2, and L3 Line Loss trip and warning from occurring during a load starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
L1 Line Loss Trip Delay (Parameter 276) allows you to define the time period an L1 Line Loss condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
IMPORTANT
The Line Loss Inhibit Timer starts when L1, L2, or L3 Line Loss protection is activated by a programmed digital input (see Input Assignment Parameters 196-201). The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for
Line Loss condition until the Line Loss Inhibit Timer expires.
Indicate a warning
IMPORTANT
The Line Loss Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Line Loss Inhibit Timer has expired, the L1 Line Loss Warning indication is instantaneous.
The E300 relay can digitally monitor the voltage supplied to an electric motor to help protect against poor voltage quality. You can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage is either too high, too low, or wrong rotation. The following E300 Sensing
Modules provide voltage monitoring capabilities.
Table 26 - Voltage Capabilities
Catalog Number
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
Measurement Method L-L Voltage Trip/Warning Range
Internal
Internal
External
20…800V
20…800V
20…6500V
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
129
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
This voltage information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
•
Undervoltage trip/warning
•
Overvoltage trip/warning
•
Voltage imbalance trip/warning
•
Phase rotation mismatch trip
•
Under frequency trip/warning
•
Over frequency trip/warning
Voltage Trip Enable (Parameter 184) and Voltage Warning Enable (Parameter 190) are used to enable the respective voltage-based protective trip and warning functions.
Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) and Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) are used to view the status of the respective voltage-based protective trip and warning functions.
Voltage Trip
The E300 relay trips with a voltage indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
A voltage trip is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
A voltage inhibit time has expired
•
The minimum phase voltage is less than the trip level for a time period greater than the trip delay.
If the E300 relay trips on a voltage, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 1-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Voltage Trip Status (Parameter 5) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
130
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Under Voltage Trip
Under Voltage Inhibit Time
Under Voltage Trip Delay
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Voltage Warning
The E300 relay indicates a voltage warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
A voltage warning is enabled
•
Voltage is present
•
A voltage condition exists
•
Inhibit Time has expired
When the voltage warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 1-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Voltage Warning Status (Parameter 11) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a warning alarm close
Undervoltage Protection
Electric motors consume more electric current when the voltage supplied to the motor is lower than the motor nameplate rating. This can damage to an electric motor over an extended period of time. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Under
Voltage Trip and Warning function to detect for low voltage levels to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
5
20
Indicate a trip
355
356
Inhibit an under voltage trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an under voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
131
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Under Voltage Trip Level
Under Voltage Warning
Under Voltage Warn Level
Parameter Number Description
357
Define the voltage at which the E300 relay trips on an under voltage. It is user-adjustable from
0…6553.5 volts.
IMPORTANT
The Under Voltage Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under voltage condition until the Under Voltage Inhibit Time expires.
11
20
Indicate a warning
358
Under Voltage Warn Level (Parameter 358) allows you to define the voltage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…6553.5 volts.
IMPORTANT
The Under Voltage Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under Voltage
Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Voltage Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name
Over Voltage Trip
Over Voltage Inhibit Time
Over Voltage Trip Delay
Over Voltage Trip Level
Over Voltage Warning
Over Voltage Warn Level
132
Overvoltage Protection
The winding insulation for electric motors degrades faster when more voltage is supplied to the motor than the motor nameplate rating. This can damage to an electric motor over an extended period of time. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Over
Voltage Trip and Warning function to detect for high voltage levels to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Parameter Number Description
5
20
Indicate a trip
359
360
361
Inhibit an over voltage trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an over voltage condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the voltage at which the E300 relay trips on an over voltage. It is user-adjustable from
0…6553.5 volts.
IMPORTANT
The Over Voltage Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over voltage condition until the Over Voltage Inhibit Time expires.
11
20
Indicate a warning
362
Define the voltage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…6553.5 volts.
IMPORTANT
The Over Voltage Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Voltage Inhibit
Time has expired, the Over Voltage Warning indication is instantaneous.
Voltage Imbalance Protection
A voltage imbalance can be caused by poor power quality and unequal distribution of power. When a voltage imbalance exists, the motor can experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in degradation of the motor insulation and reduction of life expectancy. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Voltage Imbalance
Trip and Warning function to detect for a rapid voltage imbalance fault to minimize damage and loss of production.
Voltage Imbalance can be defined by the following equation: where
%V
Imb
= 100% * (V d
/V a
)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Voltage Imbalance Trip
Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Time
Voltage Imbalance Trip Delay
Voltage Imbalance Trip Level
Voltage Imbalance Warning
Voltage Imbalance Warning Level
Parameter Name
Phase Rotation Trip
Phase Rotation Inhibit Time
Phase Rotation Trip Type
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
%V
Imb
= Percent Voltage Imbalance
V d
= Maximum Deviation from the Average Voltage
V a
= Average Voltage
Parameter Number Description
5
20
Indicate a trip
365
366
367
Inhibit a voltage imbalance trip from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from
0…250 seconds.
Define the time period a voltage imbalance condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the percentage at which the E300 relay trips on a voltage imbalance. It is user-adjustable from
10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Voltage Imbalance Inhibit Timer starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a voltage imbalance condition until the Voltage Imbalance
Inhibit Time expires.
11
20
Indicate a warning
368
Define the percentage at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
10…100%.
IMPORTANT
The Voltage Imbalance Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Voltage
Imbalance Inhibit Time has expired, the Voltage Imbalance Warning indication is instantaneous.
Phase Rotation Protection
Wiring of a three-phase voltage system can affect the rotational direction of an electric motor. The E300 relay can help protect against the improper phase rotation so that an electric motor rotates in the proper direction, ABC or ACB, to prevent equipment from being damaged.
Parameter Number Description
5
20
Indicate a trip
363
364
Inhibit a phase rotation mismatch trip and warning from occurring. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the required voltage phase rotation for the motor application. E300 relay trips on a phase rotation mismatch when this parameter does not match the measured voltage phase rotation. It is user-adjustable, ABC or ACB.
IMPORTANT
The Phase Rotation Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for a phase rotation mismatch condition until the Phase Rotation
Inhibit Time expires.
Frequency Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against poor voltage quality by offering frequency-based protection. This protection is used when electric power is provided by stand-alone electric generators. You can prevent a contactor from energizing if the voltage frequency is either too high or too low. The E300 relay can monitor for this condition with its Over and Under Frequency Trip and Warning function, and it can detect for an improper voltage frequency to minimize motor damage and loss of production.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
133
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Under Frequency Trip
Under Frequency Inhibit Time
Under Frequency Trip Delay
Under Frequency Trip Level
Under Frequency Warning
Under Frequency Warn Level
Parameter Name
Over Frequency Trip
Over Frequency Inhibit Time
Over Frequency Trip Delay
Over Frequency Trip Level
Over Frequency Warning
Over Frequency Warn Level
Power Protection
Parameter Name
5
20
369
370
371
11
20
372
Description
Indicate a trip
Inhibit an under frequency trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an under frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the frequency at which the E300 relay trips on an under frequency. It is user-adjustable from
46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Under Frequency Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under frequency condition until the Under Frequency Inhibit
Time expires.
Indicate a warning
Define the frequency at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Under Frequency Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Frequency
Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Frequency Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Number Description
5
20
Indicate a trip
373
374
375
Inhibit an over frequency trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an over frequency condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the frequency at which the E300 relay trips on an over frequency. It is user-adjustable from
46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Over Frequency Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over frequency condition until the Over Frequency Inhibit Time expires.
11
20
Indicate a warning
376
Over Frequency Warn Level (Parameter 376) allows you to define the frequency at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 46…65 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The Over Frequency Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over Frequency
Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Frequency Warning indication is instantaneous.
The E300 relay can digitally monitor the power that is supplied to an electric motor to help protect against poor power quality or alert you when power consumed by the motor differs from what is expected. This protection is useful for pump cavitation and pump material change detection. The following E300 Sensing Modules provide power monitoring capabilities.
Table 27 - Power Capabilities
Catalog Number
193-ESM-VIG-__-__
592-ESM-VIG-__-__
193-ESM-VIG-30A-CT
Measurement Method L-L Voltage Trip/Warning Range
Internal 20…800V
Internal
External
20…800V
20…6500V
134
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
This power information is used for the following protective trip and warning functions:
•
Under Real Power (kW) Trip/Warning
•
Over Real Power (kW) Trip/Warning
•
Under Reactive Power (kVAR) Trip/Warning
•
Over Reactive Power (kVAR) Trip/Warning
•
Under Apparent Power (kVA) Trip/Warning
•
Over Apparent Power (kVA) Trip/Warning
•
Under Power Factor Trip/Warning
•
Over Power Factor Trip/Warning
Power Trip Enable (Parameter 185) and Power Warning Enable (Parameter 191) are used to enable the respective power-based protective trip and warning functions.
Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) and Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) are used to view the status of the respective power-based protective trip and warning functions.
Power Trip
The E300 relay trips with power indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
A power trip is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Power inhibit time has expired
•
The total power is less than the trip level for a time period greater than the trip delay.
If the E300 relay trips on power, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 2-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Power Trip Status (Parameter 6) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
135
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Under kW Trip
Under kW Inhibit Time
Under kW Trip Delay
136
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Power Warning
The E300 relay indicates a power warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
A Power warning is enabled
•
Current is present
•
Voltage is present
•
Power inhibit time has expired
•
The power is equal to or less than the warning level
When the power warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 2-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Power Warning Status (Parameter 12) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Real Power (kW) Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against real power (kW) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the real power (kW) consumption of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
378
379
Inhibit an under real power (kW) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence.
It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an under real power (kW) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Under kW Trip Level
Under kW Warning
Under kW Warn Level
Parameter Name
Over kW Trip
Over kW Inhibit Time
Over kW Trip Delay
Over kW Trip Level
Over kW Warning
Over kW Warn Level
Parameter Name
Under kVAR Consumed Trip
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Delay
Under kVAR Consumed Trip Level
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Number Description
380
Define the real power (kW) at which the E300 relay trips on an under real power (kW). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kW Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under real power (kW) condition until the Under kW Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
381
Define the real power (kW) at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kW Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kW Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kW Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
382
383
384
Inhibit an over real power (kW) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an over real power (kW) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the total real power (kW) at which the E300 relay trips on over real power (kW). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kW Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over real power (kW) condition until the Over kW Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
385
Define the real power (kW) at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kW Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kW Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kW Warning indication is instantaneous.
Reactive Power (kVAR) Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against reactive power (kVAR) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the reactive power (kVAR) of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
386
387
388
Inhibit an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300relay trips on an under reactive power
(kVAR) consumed. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition until the
Under kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time expires.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
137
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Under kVAR Consumed Warning
Under kVAR Consumed Warn Level
Under kVAR Generated Trip
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time
Under kVAR Generated Trip Delay
Under kVAR Generated Trip Level
Under kVAR Generated Warning
Under kVAR Generated Warn Level
Parameter Name
Over kVAR Consumed Trip
Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Delay
Over kVAR Consumed Trip Level
Over kVAR Consumed Warning
Over kVAR Consumed Warn Level
Over kVAR Generated Trip
Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time
Over kVAR Generated Trip Delay
Parameter Number Description
12
20
Indicate a warning
389
Define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Consumed Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kVAR consumed Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVAR Consumed Warning indication is instantaneous.
6
20
Indicate a trip
394
395
396
Inhibit Time (Parameter 394) allows you to inhibit an under power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an under reactive power (kVAR) generated condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay trips on an under reactive power
(kVAR) generated. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under reactive power (kVAR) generated condition until the
Under kVAR Generated Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
397
Under kVAR Generated Warn Level (Parameter 397) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVAR Generated Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kVAR generated Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVAR Generated Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
390
391
392
Inhibit an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the total reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 relay trips on over reactive power
(kVAR) consumed. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over reactive power (kVAR) consumed condition until the Over kVAR Consumed Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
393
Over kVAR Consumed Warn Level (Parameter 393) allows you to define the reactive power (kVAR) consumed at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Consumed Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kVAR
Consumed Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVAR Consumed Warning indication is instantaneous.
6
20
Indicate a trip
398
399
Inhibit an over reactive power (kVAR) generated trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an over reactive power (kVAR) generated condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
138
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Under kVA Trip
Under kVA Inhibit Time
Under kVA Trip Delay
Under kVA Trip Level
Under kVA Warning
Under kVA Warn Level
Parameter Name
Over kVA Trip
Over kVA Inhibit Time
Over kVA Trip Delay
Parameter Name
Over kVAR Generated Trip Level
Over kVAR Generated Warning
Over kVAR Generated Warn Level
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Number Description
400
Define the total reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay trips on over reactive power
(kVAR) generated. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IIMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over reactive power (kVAR) generated condition until the Over kVAR Generated Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
401
Define the reactive power (kVAR) generated at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over kVAR Generated Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kVAR
Generated Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVAR Generated Warning indication is instantaneous.
Apparent Power (kVA) Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against apparent power (kVA) for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the apparent power (kVA) consumption of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
402
403
404
Inhibit an under apparent power (kVA) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an under apparent power (kVA) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Under kVA Trip Level (Parameter 404) allows you to define the apparent power (kVA) at which the E300 relay trips on an under apparent power (kVA). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVA Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under apparent power (kVA) condition until the Under kVA Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
405
Under kVA Warn Level (Parameter 405) allows you to define the apparent power (kVA) at which the
E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
IMPORTANT
The Under kVA Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Under kVA Inhibit Time has expired, the Under kVA Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
406
407
Inhibit an over apparent power (kVA) trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an over apparent power (kVA) condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
139
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Over kVA Trip Level
Over kVA Warning
Over kVA Warn Level
Parameter Number Description
408
Over kVA Trip Level (Parameter 408) allows you to define the total apparent power (kVA) at which the
E300 relay trips on over apparent power (kVA). It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
IMPORTANT
The Over kVA Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over apparent power (kVA) condition until the Over kVA Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
409
Over kVA Warn Level (Parameter 409) allows you to define the apparent power (kVA) at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kVA.
IMPORTANT
The Over kVA Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over kVA Inhibit Time has expired, the Over kVA Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Name
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip
Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay
Under Power Factor Lagging Trip Level
Under Power Factor Lagging Warning
Under Power Factor Lagging Warn Level
Under Power Factor Leading Trip
Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Delay
Power Factor Protection
The E300 relay has the capability to help protect against power factor for specific applications that require the monitoring of both voltage and current. You can help protect or issue a warning if the power factor of an electric motor is either too high or too low.
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
410
411
412
Inhibit an under power factor lagging trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an under power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the power factor lagging at which the E300 relay trips on an under power factor lagging. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under power factor lagging condition until the Under
Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
413
Define the power factor lagging at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Lagging Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the
Under Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Power Factor Lagging Warning indication is instantaneous.
6
20
Indicate a trip
418
419
Inhibit an under power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an under power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
140
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Under Power Factor Leading Trip Level
Under Power Factor Leading Warning
Under Power Factor Leading Warn Level
Parameter Name
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip
Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Delay
Over Power Factor Lagging Trip Level
Over Power Factor Lagging Warning
Over Power Factor Lagging Warn Level
Over Power Factor Leading Trip
Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Delay
Over Power Factor Leading Trip Level
Over Power Factor Leading Warning
Over Power Factor Leading Warn Level
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Parameter Number Description
420
Define the power factor leading at which the E300 relay trips on an under power factor leading. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an under power factor leading condition until the Under
Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
421
Define the power factor leading at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Under Power Factor Leading Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the
Under Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired, the Under Power Factor Leading Warning indication is instantaneous.
Parameter Number Description
6
20
Indicate a trip
414
415
416
Inhibit an over power factor lagging trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an over power factor lagging condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the total power factor lagging at which the E300 relay trips on over power factor lagging. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over power factor lagging condition until the Over Power
Factor Lagging Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
417
Define the power factor lagging at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Lagging Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over
Power Factor Lagging Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Power Factor Lagging Warning indication is instantaneous.
6
20
Indicate a trip
422
423
424
Inhibit an over power factor leading trip and warning from occurring during the motor starting sequence. It is adjustable from 0…250 seconds.
Define the time period an over power factor leading condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from 0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the total power factor leading at which the E300 relay trips on over power factor leading. It is user-adjustable from 0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time starts after a phase voltage transitions from 0V to 20V L-L and a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device. The
E300 relay does not begin monitoring for an over power factor leading condition until the Over Power
Factor Leading Inhibit Time expires.
12
20
Indicate a warning
425
Define the power factor leading at which the E300 relay indicates a warning. It is user-adjustable from
0…2,000,000 kW.
IMPORTANT
The Over Power Factor Leading Warning function does not include a time delay feature. Once the Over
Power Factor Leading Inhibit Time has expired, the Over Power Factor Leading Warning indication is instantaneous.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
141
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Control Protection
142
The E300 relay provides a number of control-based protection functions including:
•
Test Trip
•
Operator Station Trip
•
Remote Trip
•
Start Inhibit
•
Preventive Maintenance
•
Configuration Trip
•
Option Match Trip/Warning
•
Expansion Bus Trip/Warning
•
Non Volatile Storage Trip
•
Test Mode Trip
Control Trip Enable (Parameter 186) and Control Warning Enable (Parameter 192) are used to enable the respective control-based protective trip and warning functions.
Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) and Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) are used to monitor the respective current-based protective trip and warning functions.
Control Trip
The E300 relay trips with a control-based indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
A control-based protection is enabled
•
You press the blue reset button on the Communication Module for more than 3 seconds.
If the E300 relay trips on a control, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a red 3-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Control Trip Status (Parameter 7) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
Control Warning
The E300 relay provides a warning indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
Warning condition exists
If the E300 relay warns, the following occurs:
•
The TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 3-long / 2-short blink pattern
•
Bit 1 in Control Warning Status (Parameter 13) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a warning alarm closes
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Test Trip
Parameter Name
Thermistor (PTC) Trip
Thermistor (PTC) Warning
Parameter Name
DeviceLogix Trip
DeviceLogix Warning
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Test Trip
The E300 relay provides the capability to put the overload relay into a Test Trip state. You can implement this feature when commissioning a motor control circuit to verify the response of the E300 relay, its associated Expansion I/O modules, and the networked automation system.
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
Thermistor (PTC) Protection
The following E300 relay control modules can accept up to 6 thermistors (PTC) temperature sensors wired in series to monitor the temperature of a motor’s windings, rotor, and/or bearings.
•
193-EIOGP-42-24D
•
193-EIOGP-22-120
•
193-EIOGP-22-240
The thermistor (PTC) based temperature sensors connect to the IT1 and IT2 terminals of the E300 Control Module.If the E300 relay trips on a thermistor.
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
13
20
Indicate a warning
DeviceLogix Protection
An E300 relay with firmware v5.000 or higher has a DeviceLogix logic engine. You can create custom logic programs for distributed motor control applications. See
for more information on DeviceLogix. DeviceLogix provides you with the capability to create a customized protection algorithm that can generate a trip or warning event.
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
13
20
Indicate a warning
Operator Station Trip
The E300 relay provides the capability to plug and play its optional operator stations. The operator station protection feature trips the E300 relay when you press the red 0 (stop) button. This feature is a failsafe mechanism to allow you to de-energize a contactor coil anytime the red 0 (stop) button is pressed.
Operator Station Trip should be disabled when an operator station is being used to send start and stop signals to an automation control system.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
143
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Operator Station Trip
Parameter Name
Remote Trip
Parameter Name
Blocked Start Trip
Starts Per Hour
Starts Interval
Starts Available
Time to Start
Parameter Name
Number of Starts Warning
Total Starts
Starts Counter
Operating Hours Warning
Total Operating Hours
Operating Time
144
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
You can also press the red O button on an operator station to trigger a trip.
Remote Trip
The E300 relay provides the capability to remotely cause the E300 relay to trip via a
network command or assigned digital input on the Control Module (see Chapter 3
for digital input assignments). This feature allows the capability of tripping the E300 relay from a remote source such as a vibration switch or external monitoring relay.
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
A trip can also occur when a Control Module’s digital input with a remote trip assignment is activated or the Communication Module receives a remote trip command from the communication network
Start Inhibit Protection
This protective function allows you to limit the number of starts in a given time period and limit the operating hours for an electric motor. A start is defined as the E300 relay sensing a transition in current from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA rating of the device.
The Blocked Start protective function is set by Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205) and/or
Starts Interval (Parameter 206).Time to Start
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
205
206
Number of starts within the last hour (60 minutes). This value is adjustable from 0…120 starts.
Time that you must wait between starts. This value is adjustable from 0…3600 seconds.
30
31
Number of starts currently available based on the blocked start settings and the actual motor starting events.
Amount of the time remaining until a new start can be issued. If the Time to Start time has elapsed, this parameter reports zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs.
Preventive Maintenance
The E300 relay offers preventive maintenance warnings based on the number of start cycles and the number of operating hours. These warnings can be used to alert you that the number of starts or number of operating hours has been reached, and it is time to perform preventive maintenance.
Parameter Number Description
13
20
207
Indicate a warning
Set the number of starts until the starts counter warning occurs.
29
Number of times a motor has been started. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command
(Parameter 165) function
Clear Operating Statistics
.
13
20
208
28
Indicate a warning
Set the number operating hours that a motor can operate until the operating hours warning occurs.
Number hours that a motor has been running. This value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command
(Parameter 165) function
Clear Operating Statistics
.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Hardware Fault Trip
Parameter Name
Feedback Timeout
Contactor Feedback Trip
Contactor Feedback Warning
Parameter Name
Nonvoltaile Storage Fault Trip
Parameter Name
Test Mode Trip
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
Hardware Fault
The E300 relay continuously monitors the status of the Control, Sensing, and
Communication Modules. The E300 relay issues a hardware fault trip if there is an issue with the Control, Sensing, and Communication Modules or if one of the modules is missing or incompatible. The Hardware Fault Trip is always enabled.
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
Contactor Feedback Protection
An E300 relay with firmware v5.000 or higher has the capability to control motors using its Operating Modes. You can select one of the pre-programmed Operating Modes that monitor the feedback status of a contactor by wiring the auxiliary contacts of the
contactor into one of the digital inputs of the E300 relay. See Chapter 4 for more
information on Operating Modes.
7
20
13
20
Parameter Number Description
213
Amount time in milliseconds a Feedback based Operating Mode waits to receive a contactor feedback signal after the contactor has been issued an energize command.
Indicate a trip
Indicate a warning
Nonvolatile Storage Fault
The E300 relay continuously monitors the status of its nonvolatile storage. The E300 relay issues a nonvolatile storage fault trip if there is an issue with its nonvolatile storage or if it becomes corrupt. The Nonvolatile Storage Fault Trip is always enabled.
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
Test Mode Trip
Some motor control center enclosures include a Test Position in which the motor power is disconnected from the enclosure, but the control power is still active. This allows motor control center commissioning staff to verify that the motor starter is mechanically working and communication is established with the automation control system. The
E300 relay provides the capability to put the overload relay into a Test Mode Trip state if motor control center enclosure is in a test position, and the E300 relay detects motor current and/or voltage is present.
Parameter Number Description
7
20
Indicate a trip
IMPORTANT
Motor current is detected when a phase of load current transitions from 0 A to 30% of the minimum FLA setting of the device
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
145
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Analog Protection
The E300 relay’s Analog I/O Expansion Modules scan up to three analog signals per module. This information can be used to trigger an over analog level Trip or Warning.
The analog-based protection features can be used with the following analog applications:
•
Monitoring motor winding and bearing temperatures that are measured by RTD sensors
•
Monitoring liquid, air, or steam flow
•
Monitoring temperature
•
Monitoring weight
•
Monitoring levels
•
Monitoring a potentiometer
•
Monitoring PTC or NTC thermistor sensors
Analog Trip Enable (Parameter 187) and Analog Warning Enable (Parameter 193) are used to enable the respective analog-based protective trip and warning functions.
Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) and Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) are used to monitor the respective analog-based protective trip and warning functions.
Analog Trip
The E300 relay trips with an analog module trip indication if:
•
No trip currently exists
•
The trip is enabled
•
The measured analog input signal is greater than the trip level for a time period greater than the level trip delay.
If the E300 relay trips on an analog module channel, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED status indicator flashes a red 4-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Analog Trip Status (Parameter 8) sets to 1
•
Bit 0 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Control Relay open
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Trip Alarm close
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Normal Relay are placed in their Protection
Fault state (if so programmed)
146
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Chapter 5
IMPORTANT
The Protection Fault State of Relay 0, Relay 1, Relay 2, Digital Module 1 Output Relays,
Digital Module 2 Output Relays, Digital Module 3 Output Relays, and Digital Module 4
Output Relays are defined by the respective parameters:
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 304)
•
Output PT00 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 305)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 310)
•
Output PT01 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 311)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 316)
•
Output PT02 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 317)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 322)
•
Output Digital Module 1 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 323)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 328)
•
Output Digital Module 2 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 329)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 334)
•
Output Digital Module 3 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 335)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Action (Parameter 340)
•
Output Digital Module 4 Protection Fault Value (Parameter 342)
Analog Warning
The E300 relay indicates an analog warning if:
•
No warning currently exists
•
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Warning is enabled
•
The maximum phase current is equal to or greater than the Analog Module 1 –
Channel 00 Warning Level
When the warning conditions are satisfied, the:
•
TRIP/WARN LED flashes a yellow 4-long / 1-short blink pattern
•
Bit 0 in Analog Warning Status (Parameter 14) sets to 1
•
Bit 1 in Device Status 0 (Parameter 20) sets to 1
•
Any relay outputs configured as a Warning Alarm close
Analog Module
The E300 supports as many as 4 analog modules. Analog I/O Expansion Module scans up to three analog signals. An over level trip or warning can be configured for each input channel.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
147
Chapter 5
Protective Trip and Warning Functions
Parameter Name
Analog Module Over Level Trip
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Over Level Trip Delay
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Trip Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Trip Level
Analog Module Over Level Warning
Analog Module 1 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 1 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 2 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 3 – Channel 02 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 00 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 01 Warning Level
Analog Module 4 – Channel 02 Warning Level
476
485
494
507
516
525
537
546
555
14
20
445
454
463
538
547
556
475
484
493
506
515
524
474
483
492
505
514
523
536
545
554
444
453
462
Parameter Number Description
8
20
Indicate a trip
443
452
461
Define the time period a l evel condition must be present before a trip occurs. It is adjustable from
0.1…25.0 seconds.
Define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on a level trip. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
Indicate a warning
Define the magnitude of the analog signal in which the E300 relay trips on a warning. It is user-adjustable from -32768…+32767.
148
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter
6
Commands
This chapter provides detailed information about the reset, clear, and pre-configuration functions of the E300™ Electronic Overload Relay. The E300 relay provides three types of commands:
• Trip reset
• Configuration preset
• Clear command
Trip Reset
Trip Reset (Parameter 163) allows you to reset an E300 relay when it is in a tripped state. Trip Reset has the same functionality as pressing the blue reset button on E300 communication module and using the Trip Reset bit in the consumed output assemblies of a communication network.
A trip reset can only be performed when all conditions for the trip event have been cleared. For an overload trip event, the % Thermal Capacity Utilized (Parameter 1) must be below the value that is specified in Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174).
Configuration Preset
The E300 relay has a number of preset configurations that allow you to quickly configure all configuration parameters that are needed for a specific operating mode in one command. This also allows you to restore the factory default values for all configuration parameters in the E300 relay.
The following pages list the available configuration presets and the values for the associated pre-configured configuration values.
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
139 TripHistoryMaskI 0xFFFF
140 TripHistoryMaskV
141 TripHistoryMaskP
142 TripHistoryMaskC
143 TripHistoryMaskA
0x003F
0x0FFF
0x27FF
0x0FFF
145 WarnHistoryMaskI 0xFFFF
146 WarnHistoryMaskV 0x003F
147 WarnHistoryMaskP 0x0FFF
148 WarnHistoryMaskC 0x1FFF
Units
Factory Defaults
When the Factory Defaults configuration preset command is selected, the E300 relay restores all configuration parameters back to their original factory default values.
Figure 78 - Factory Default Values
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
304 OutPt00PrFltAct Goto Value
305 OutPt00PrFltVal
306 OutPt00ComFltAct
307 OutPt00ComFltVal
308 OutPt00ComIdlAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
309 OutPt00ComIdlVal
310 OutPt01PrFltAct
311 OutPt01PrFltVal
312 OutPt01ComFltAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Units No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
428 Screen1Param1 1
429 Screen1Param2
430 Screen2Param1
431 Screen2Param2
432 Screen3Param1
50
2
3
51
433 Screen3Param2
434 Screen4Param1
435 Screen4Param2
436 DisplayTimeout
52
38
39
300
Units
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
149
Chapter 6
Commands
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
149 WarnHistoryMaskA 0x0FFF
171 FLASetting 0.50
172 TripClass
173 OLPTCResetMode
174 OLResetLevel
175 OLWarningLevel
10
Automatic
75
85
176 SingleOrThreePh
177 FLA2Setting
183 TripEnableI
184 TripEnableV
185 TripEnableP
186 TripEnableC
187 TripEnableA
189 WarningEnableI
Three Phase
0.50
0x0003
0
0
0
0
0x20C9
190
191
192
193
195
WarningEnableV
WarningEnableP
WarningEnableC
WarningEnableA
SetOperatingMode
196 InPt00Assignment
197 InPt01Assignment
198 InPt02Assignment
199 InPt03Assignment
200 InPt04Assignment
201 InPt05Assignment
Normal
Normal
202 OutPt0Assignment * Trip Relay
203 OutPt1Assignment Normal
0
0
0
0
Net
Overload
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
204 OutPt2Assignment Normal
205 StartsPerHour 2
206 StartsInterval
207 PMTotalStarts
600
0
208 PMOperatingHours 0
209 ActFLA2wOutput Disable
211 SecurityPolicy
212 Language
213 FeedbackTimeout
0x801F
English
500
214 TransitionDelay
215 InterlockDelay
216 EmergencyStartEn
10000
100
Disable
221 ControlModuleTyp
222 SensingModuleTyp
Ignore
Ignore
223 CommsModuleType Ignore
224 OperStationType
225 DigitalMod1Type
226 DigitalMod2Type
227 DigitalMod3Type
228 DigitalMod4Type
229 AnalogMod1Type
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Ignore
Units
Amps
%TCU
%TCU
Amps
Seconds
Hrs
331 OutDig2ComFltVal
332 OutDig2ComIdlAct
333 OutDig2ComIdlVal
334 OutDig3PrFltAct
335 OutDig3PrFltVal
336 OutDig3ComFltAct
337 OutDig3ComFltVal
338 OuDig3ComIdlAct
339 OutDig3ComIdlVal
340 OutDig4PrFltAct
341 OutDig4PrFltVal
342 OutDig4ComFltAct
343 OutDig4ComFltVal
344 OutDig4ComIdlAct
345 OutDig4ComIdlVal
346 CommOverride
347 NetworkOverride
350 PtDevOutCOSMask
352 VoltageMode
353 PTPrimary
354 PTSecondary
355 UVInhibitTime
356 UVTripDelay
357 UVTripLevel
358 UVWarningLevel
359 OVInhibitTime
360 OVTripDelay
361 OVTripLevel
362 OVWarningLevel
363 PhRotInhibitTime
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
313 OutPt01ComFltVal
314 OutPt01ComIdlAct
Open
Goto Value
315 OutPt01ComIdlVal
316 OutPt02PrFltAct
317 OutPt02PrFltVal
318 OutPt02ComFltAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
319 OutPt02ComFltVal
320 OutPt02ComIdlAct
321 OutPt02ComIdlVal
322 OutDig1PrFltAct
323 OutDig1PrFltVal
324 OutDig1ComFltAct
325 OutDig1ComFltVal
326 OutDig1ComIdlAct
327 OutDig1ComIdlVal
328 OutDigp2PrFltAct
329 OutDig2PrFltVal
330 OutDig2ComFltAct
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Units
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Disable
Disable
0x0000
Delta
480
480
10
1.0
100.0
400.0
10
1.0
500.0
490.0
10
Seconds
Seconds
Volt
Volt
Seconds
Seconds
Volt
Volt
Seconds
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
437 InAnMod1Ch00Type Disable
438 InAMod1Ch0Format Eng Units
439 InAMod1C0TmpUnit Degrees C
440 InAMod1C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
441 InAMod1C0OpCktSt Upscale
442 InAnMod1Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
443 InAMod1C0TripDly
444 InAMod1C0TripLvl
1.0
0
445 InAMod1C0WarnLvl 0
446 InAnMod1Ch01Type Disable
447 InAMod1Ch1Format Eng Units
448 InAMod1C1TmpUnit Degrees C
449 InAMod1C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
450 InAMod1C1OpCktSt Upscale
451 InAnMod1Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
452 InAMod1C1TripDly 1.0
453 InAMod1C1TripLvl 0
454 InAMod1C1WarnLvl 0
455 InAnMod1Ch02Type Disable
456 InAMod1Ch2Format Eng Units
457 InAMod1C2TmpUnit Degrees C
458 InAMod1C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
459 InAMod1C2OpCktSt Upscale
460 InAnMod1Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
461 InAMod1C2TripDly 1.0
462 InAMod1C2TripLvl 0
463 InAMod1C2WarnLvl 0
464 OutAnMod1Type
465 OutAnMod1Select
Disable
Ave %FLA
466 OutAnMod1FltActn Zero
467 OutAnMod1IdlActn Zero
468 InAnMod2Ch00Type Disable
469 InAMod2Ch0Format Eng Units
470 InAMod2C0TmpUnit Degrees C
471 InAMod2C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
472 InAMod2C0OpCktSt Upscale
473 InAnMod2Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
474 InAMod2C0TripDly 1.0
475 InAMod2C0TripLvl 0
476 InAMod2C0WarnLvl 0
477 InAnMod2Ch01Type Disable
478 InAMod2Ch1Format Eng Units
479 InAMod2C1TmpUnit Degrees C
480 InAMod2C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
481 InAMod2C1OpCktSt Upscale
482 InAnMod2Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
483 InAMod2C1TripDly
484 InAMod2C1TripLvl
1.0
0
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
150
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Commands
Chapter 6
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
230 AnalogMod2Type
231 AnalogMod3Type
Ignore
Ignore
232 AnalogMod4Type
233 MismatchAction
239 PLInhibitTime
240 PLTripDelay
Ignore
0x0000
0
1
241 GroundFaultType
242 GFInhibitTime
243 GFTripDelay
244 GFTripLevel
245 GFWarningDelay
246 GFWarningLevel
247 GFFilter
248 GFMaxInhibit
Internal
10
0.5
2.50
0
2.00
Disable
Disable
249 StallEnabledTime
250 StallTripLevel
251 JamInhibitTime
252 JamTripDelay
253 JamTripLevel
254 JamWarningLevel
255 ULInhibitTime
256 ULTripDelay
257 ULTripLevel
258 ULWarningLevel
259 CIInhibitTime
260 CITripDelay
261 CITripLevel
262 CIWarningLevel
263 CTPrimary
264 CTSecondary
5
5
35
20
50
70
10
5.0
250
150
10
5.0
10
600
10
5.0
265 UCInhibitTime
266 L1UCTripDelay
267 L1UCTripLevel
268 L1UCWarningLevel
269 L2UCTripDelay
270 L2UCTripLevel
271 L2UCWarningLevel
272 L3UCTripDelay
273 L3UCTripLevel
274 L3UCWarningLevel
275 OCInhibitTime
276 L1OCTripDelay
277 L1OCTripLevel
278 L1OCWarningLevel
279 L2OCTripDelay
280 L2OCTripLevel
281 L2OCWarningLevel
282 L3OCTripDelay
283 L3OCTripLevel
40
1.0
35
40
10
1.0
10
1.0
35
40
1.0
35
100
90
1.0
100
100
90
1.0
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Amps
Seconds
Amps
Seconds
%FLA
Seconds
Seconds
%FLA
%FLA
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
%FLA
%FLA
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
%
394 UVARGInhibitTime
395 UVARGTripDelay
396 UVARGTripLevel
397 UVARGWarnLevel
398 OVARGInhibitTime
399 OVARGTripDelay
400 OVARGTripLevel
401 OVARGWarnLevel
402 UVAInhibitTime
403 UVATripDelay
404 UVATripLevel
405 UVAWarningLevel
406 OVAInhibitTime
407 OVATripDelay
408 OVATripLevel
409 OVAWarningLevel
410 UPFLagInhibTime
411 UPFLagTripDelay
412 UPFLagTripLevel
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
364 PhaseRotTripType
365 VIBInhibitTime
ABC
10
366 VIBTripDelay
367 VIBTripLevel
368 VIBWarningLevel
369 UFInhibitTime
1.0
15
10
10
370 UFTripDelay
371 UFTripLevel
372 UFWarningLevel
373 OFInhibitTime
374 OFTripDelay
375 OFTripLevel
376 OFWarningLevel
377 PowerScale
1.0
63
62 kW
58
10
1.0
57
378 UWInhibitTime
379 UWTripDelay
380 UWTripLevel
381 UWWarningLevel
382 OWInhibitTime
383 OWTripDelay
384 OWTripLevel
385 OWWarningLevel
386 UVARCInhibitTime
387 UVARCTripDelay
388 UVARCTripLevel
389 UVARCWarnLevel
390 OVARCInhibitTime
391 OVARCTripDelay
392 OVARCTripLevel
393 OVARCWarnLevel
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
10
1.0
0.000
0.000
10
1.0
-90
Units
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
Hz
Hz
Seconds
Seconds
Hz
Hz
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kVA kVA
Seconds
Seconds kVA kVA
Seconds
Seconds
%
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kVAR kVAR
Seconds
Seconds kW kW
Seconds
Seconds kW kW
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
485 InAMod2C1WarnLvl 0
486 InAnMod2Ch02Type Disable
487 InAMod2Ch2Format Eng Units
488 InAMod2C2TmpUnit Degrees C
489 InAMod2C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
490 InAMod2C2OpCktSt Upscale
491 InAnMod2Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
492 InAMod2C2TripDly 1.0
493 InAMod2C2TripLvl 0
494 InAMod2C2WarnLvl 0
495 OutAnMod2Type
496 OutAnMod2Select
Disable
Ave %FLA
497 OutAnMod2FltActn Zero
498 OutAnMod2dlActn Zero
499 InAnMod3Ch00Type Disable
500 InAMod3Ch0Format Eng Units
501 InAMod3C0TmpUnit Degrees C
502 InAMod3C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
503 InAMod3C0OpCktSt Upscale
504 InAnMod3Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
505 InAMod3C0TripDly
506 InAMod3C0TripLvl
1.0
0
507 InAMod3C0WarnLvl 0
508 InAnMod3Ch01Type Disable
509 InAMod3Ch1Format Eng Units
510 InAMod3C1TmpUnit Degrees C
511 InAMod3C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
512 InAMod3C1OpCktSt Upscale
513 InAnMod3Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
514 InAMod3C1TripDly 1.0
515 InAMod3C1TripLvl 0
516 InAMod3C1WarnLvl 0
517 InAnMod3Ch02Type Disable
518 InAMod3Ch2Format Eng Units
519 InAMod3C2TmpUnit Degrees C
520 InAMod3C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
521 InAMod3C2OpCktSt Upscale
522 InAnMod3Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
523 InAMod3C2TripDly 1.0
524 InAMod3C2TripLvl 0
525 InAMod3C2WarnLvl 0
526 OutAnMod3Type Disable
527 OutAnMod3Select Ave %FLA
528 OutAnMod3FltActn Zero
529 OutAnMod3dlActn Zero
530 InAnMod4Ch00Type Disable
531 InAMod4Ch0Format Eng Units
532 InAMod3C0TmpUnit Degrees C
533 InAMod4C0FiltFrq 17 Hz
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
151
Chapter 6
Commands
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
284 L3OCWarningLevel
285 LineLossInhTime
90
10
286 L1LossTripDelay
287 L2LossTripDelay
288 L3LossTripDelay
291 Datalink0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0
292 Datalink1
293 Datalink2
294 Datalink3
295 Datalink4
296 Datalink5
297 Datalink6
298 Datalink7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Units
%
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
413 UPFLagWarnLevel
414 OPFLagInhibTime
-95
10
415 OPFLagTripDelay
416 OPFLagTripLevel
417 OPFLagWarnLevel
418 UPFLeadInhibTime
1.0
-95
-90
10
419 UPFLeadTripDelay
420 UPFLeadTripLevel
421 UPFLeadWarnLevel 95
422 OPFLeadInhibTime 10
1.0
90
423 OPFLeadTripDelay
424 OPFLeadTripLevel
425 OPFLeadWarnLevel 90
426 DemandPeriod 15
427 NumberOfPeriods
1.0
95
1
Units
%
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Seconds
Seconds
%
%
Min
No.
Parameter Name Default
Value
534 InAMod4C0OpCktSt Upscale
535 InAnMod4Ch0RTDEn 3-Wire
536 InAMod4C0TripDly
537 InAMod4C0TripLvl
1.0
0
538 InAMod4C0WarnLvl 0
539 InAnMod4Ch01Type Disable
540 InAMod4Ch1Format Eng Units
541 InAMod4C1TmpUnit Degrees C
542 InAMod4C1FiltFrq 17 Hz
543 InAMod4C1OpCktSt Upscale
544 InAnMod4Ch1RTDEn 3-Wire
545 InAMod4C1TripDly 1.0
546 InAMod4C1TripLvl 0
547 InAMod4C1WarnLvl 0
548 InAnMod4Ch02Type Disable
549 InAMod4Ch2Format Eng Units
550 InAMod4C2TmpUnit Degrees C
551 InAMod4C2FiltFrq 17 Hz
552 InAMod4C2OpCktSt Upscale
553 InAnMod4Ch2RTDEn 3-Wire
554 InAMod4C2TripDly
555 InAMod4C2TripLvl
1.0
0
556 InAMod4C2WarnLvl 0
557 OutAnMod4Type Disable
558 OutAnMod4Select Ave %FLA
559 OutAnMod4FltActn Zero
560 OutAnMod4dlActn
561 FnlFltValStDur
562 OutPt00FnlFltVal
563 OutPt01FnlFltVal
Zero
Zero
Open
Open
564 OutPt02FnlFltVal
565 OutDig1FnlFltVal
566 OutDig2FnlFltVal
567 OutDig3FnlFltVal
568 OutDig4FnlFltVal
569 NetStrtComFltAct
570 NetStrtComFltVal
571 NetStrtComIdlAct
572 NetStrtComIdlVal
573 NetStrtFnlFltVal
574 VoltageScale
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Goto Value
Open
Goto Value
Open
Open
Volts
Units
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
152
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Commands
Chapter 6
Clear Command
Function Name
Clear Operating Statistics
Clear History Logs
Clear % TCU
Clear kWh
Clear kVARh
Clear kVAh
Clear Max. kW Demand
Clear Max kVAR Demand
Clear Max kVA Demand
Clear Command (Parameter 165) allows you to clear historical logs, operating statistics, and energy data within the nonvolatile memory of the E300 relay.
Table 28 - Clear Command Functions
Parameter Name
Operating Time
Starts Counter
Trip History 0
Trip History 1
Trip History 2
Trip History 3
Trip History 4
Warning History 0
Warning History 1
Warning History 2
Warning History 3
Warning History 4
Thermal Capacity Utilized kWh x 10
9 kWh x 10
6 kWh x 10
3 kWh x 10
0 kWh x 10
-3 kVARh Consumed x 10
9 kVARh Consumed x 10
6 kVARh Consumed x 10
3 kVARh Consumed x 10
0 kVARh Consumed x 10
-3 kVARh Generated x 10
9 kVARh Generated x 10
6 kVARh Generated x 10
3 kVARh Generated x 10
0 kVARh Generated x 10
-3 kVARh Net x 10
9 kVARh Net x 10
6 kVARh Net x 10
3 kVARh Net x 10
0 kVARh Net x 10
-3 kVAh x 10
9 kVAh x 10
6 kVAh x 10
3 kVAh x 10
0 kVAh x 10
-3
Max kW Demand
Max kVAR Demand
Max kVA Demand
98
99
100
101
96
97
94
95
92
93
90
91
88
89
86
87
84
85
82
83
136
1
80
81
Parameter No. Description
28
29 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
127
128
129
130
131 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
132
133
134
135 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
102
103
104
106
108
110 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when Clear %TCU command is issued sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when Clear %TCU command is issued sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when Clear %TCU command is issued
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
153
Chapter 6
Commands
Function Name
Clear All
Parameter Name
% Thermal Capacity Utilized
Operating Time
Starts Counter kWh x 10
9 kWh x 10
6 kWh x 10
3 kWh x 10
0 kWh x 10
-3 kVARh Consumed x 10
9 kVARh Consumed x 10
6 kVARh Consumed x 10
3 kVARh Consumed x 10
0 kVARh Consumed x 10
-3 kVARh Generated x 10
9 kVARh Generated x 10
6 kVARh Generated x 10
3 kVARh Generated x 10
0 kVARh Generated x 10
-3 kVARh Net x 10
9 kVARh Net x 10
6 kVARh Net x 10
3 kVARh Net x 10
0 kVARh Net x 10
-3 kVAh x 10
9 kVAh x 10
6 kVAh x 10
3 kVAh x 10
0 kVAh x 10
-3
Max kW Demand
Max kVAR Demand
Max kVA Demand
Trip History 0
Trip History 1
Trip History 2
Trip History 3
Trip History 4
Warning History 0
Warning History 1
Warning History 2
Warning History 3
Warning History 4
129
130
131
132
108
110
127
128
133
134
135
136
102
103
104
106
98
99
100
101
96
97
94
95
92
93
90
91
Parameter No. Description
1
80
81
28
29
88
89
86
87
84
85
82
83 sets related parameters to a value of zero (0) when command is issued
154
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter
7
Metering and Diagnostics
This chapter provides detailed information about the metering and diagnostic information that the E300™ Electronic Overload Relay generates. The metering and diagnostic functions are organized into seven sections:
• Device Monitor
• Current Monitor
• Voltage Monitor
• Power Monitor
• Energy Monitor
• Trip/Warning History
• Trip Snapshot
Device Monitor
The E300 relay's device monitor diagnostics provides information on the status of the device, which includes:
• Thermal overload protection
• Trip and warning protection functions
• Digital inputs and relay outputs
• Operator station
• Hardware options
• Time and date
Table 29 - Device Monitor Parameters
Parameter Name
Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
(%TCU)
Time to Trip
Time To Reset
Current Trip Status
Voltage Trip Status
Power Trip Status
Control Trip Status
Current Warning Status
Voltage Warning Status
Power Warning Status
Control Warning Status
Input Status 0
12
13
10
11
16
6
7
5
4
Parameter No. Description
1
2
• reports the calculated percent thermal capacity utilization of the motor that is being monitored
• when the percent thermal capacity utilization equals 100%, the E300 relay issues an overload trip
• overload Time to Trip indicates the estimated time remaining before an overload trip occurs when the measured motor current exceeds the trip rating of the E300 relay
• when the measured current is below the trip rating, the value is reported as 9,999 seconds
3
• reports the time remaining until the device can be reset after an overload trip
• when the %TCU value falls to or below the Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174), the Overload Time to
Reset value indicates zero until the overload trip is reset
• after an overload trip is reset, the value is reported as 0 seconds
• reports the status of the current-based protective trip functions
• reports the status of the voltage-based protective trip functions
• reports the status of the voltage-based protective trip functions
• reports the status of the control-based protective trip functions
• reports the status of the current-based protective warning functions
• reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions
• reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions
• reports the status of the control-based protective warning functions
• reports the state of the digital inputs on the E300 relay Control Module
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
155
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
Parameter Name
Input Status 1
Output Status
Operator Station Status
Device Status 0
Device Status 1
Firmware Revision Number
Control Module ID
Sensing Module ID
Operator Station ID
Expansion Digital Module ID
Expansion Analog Module ID
Operating Time
Starts Counter
Starts Available
Time to Start
Year
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Invalid Configuration Parameter
Invalid Configuration Cause
Mismatch Status
Parameter No. Description
17 • reports the state of the digital inputs on the E300 relay Digital Expansion Modules
18
19
• reports the state of the relay outputs on the E300 relay Control Module and Digital Expansion Modules
• reports the state of the E300 relay Operator Station input buttons and output LEDs
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
• reports the general status of the E300 relay and the sensing capabilities that are present
• Device Status 0 bit 14, "Ready", is cleared under the following circumstances:
– Device Status 0 bit 0, "Trip Present", is set
– The E300 relay has not completed its power-up initialization
– The processing of data in a configuration assembly is in progress
– A CopyCat function is in progress
– A Factory Defaults command has been invoked and is in progress.
• reports the specific features of the E300 relay Control and Sensing Modules
• reports which Expansion Digital Modules or Analog Modules are present on the E300 relay Expansion
Bus
• reports the firmware revision number of the E300 relay system
• identifies which specific Control Module is present in the E300 relay system
• identifies which specific Sensing Module is present in the E300 relay system
• identifies which specific Operator Station is present on the Expansion Bus of the E300 relay system
• identifies which specific Expansion Digital Modules are present on the Expansion Bus of the E300 relay system
• identifies which specific Expansion Analog Modules are present on the Expansion Bus of the E300 relay system
• represents the number of hours that a motor has been running
• you can reset this value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter 165) function Clear
Operating Statistics
• represents the number of times a motor has been started
• you can reset this value can be reset to zero using the Clear Command (Parameter 165) function Clear
Operating Statistics
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
• reports the number of starts currently available based on the blocked start settings and the actual motor starting events
• reports the amount of time remaining until a new start can be issued
• if the Time to Start time has elapsed, this parameter reports zero until the next Blocked Start trip occurs
• reports the year in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
• reports the month in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
• reports the day in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
• reports the hour in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
• reports the minute in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
• reports the second in the virtual real-time clock of the E300 relay
• reports the parameter number that is causing a configuration trip in the E300 relay
• see Chapter 3 for more information about a configuration fault
• reports the reason for the configuration trip in the E300 relay
• see Chapter 3 for more information about a configuration fault
• reports the module that is causing a mismatch trip or warning in the E300 relay
• see Chapter 3 for more information about a mismatch fault
156
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Current Monitor
Parameter Name
L1 Current
L2 Current
L3 Current
Average Current
L1 Percent FLA
L2 Percent FLA
L3 Percent FLA
Average Percent FLA
Ground Fault Current
Current Imbalance
Voltage Monitor
Parameter Name
L1-L2 Voltage
L2-L3 Voltage
L3-L1 Voltage
Average L-L Voltage
L1-N Voltage
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 7
The E300 relay current monitor diagnostics provides information on the current consumed by the load that the E300 relay is monitoring, and it provides diagnostics for a three-phase current system including imbalance and ground fault current.
Table 30 - Current Monitor Parameters
Parameter No. Description
43
• reports the current in Amperes flowing through the L1 and T1 power terminals of the E300 relay
Sensing Module
44
45
46
• reports the current in Amperes flowing through the L2 and T2 power terminals of the E300 relay
Sensing Module
• reports the current in Amperes flowing through the L3 and T3 power terminals of the E300 relay
Sensing Module
• reports the average current of the monitored current
• When single or three phase (Parameter 176) is set to three-phase, average current is calculated as follows:
– Average Current = (L1 Current + L2 Current + L3 Current) / 3
• When single or three phase (Parameter 176) is set to single phase, average current is calculated as follows:
– Average Current = (L1 Current + L2 Current) / 2
47
48
49
50
51
52
• reports the L1 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– L1 Percent FLA = L1 Current / Full Load Amp
• reports the L2 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– L2 Percent FLA = L2 Current / Full Load Amps
• reports the L3 current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter 171) and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– L3 Percent FLA = L3 Current / Full Load Amps
• reports the average current in comparison to the active Full Load Amps programmed in FLA (Parameter
171) and FLA2 (Parameter 177)
– Average Percent FLA = Average Current / Full Load Amps
• reports the ground fault current measured by the internal core balanced current transformer of the
E300 relay Sensing Module or external core balanced current transformer
• reports the percentage of uneven current consumption in the monitored power system
• Current Imbalance is defined by the following equation
– Current Imbalance = 100% * (
I
where
I
d d
/
I
a
)
= Maximum Line Current Deviation from the Average Current;
I
a
= Average Current
The E300 relay’s voltage monitor diagnostics provides information on the voltage being supplied to the load. The voltage diagnostics include three-phase voltage, phase imbalance, phase rotation, and frequency.
Table 31 - Voltage Monitor Parameters
Parameter No. Description
53
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 and T2 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing
Module
54
55
56
57
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 and T3 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing
Module
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 and T1 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing
Module
• reports the average voltage of the monitored L-L voltages
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Average L-L Voltage is calculated as follows:
– Average L-L Voltage = (L1-L2 Voltage + L2-L3 Voltage + L3-L1 Voltage) / 3
• When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Average L-L Voltage is calculated as follows:
– Average L-L Voltage = (L1-L2 Voltage + L2-L3 Voltage) / 2
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 power terminal of the E300 relay Sensing Module
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
157
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
Parameter Name
L2-N Voltage
L3-N Voltage
Average L-N Voltage
Voltage Imbalance
Frequency
Phase Rotation
Power Monitor
Parameter Name
Power Scale
L1 Real Power
L2 Real Power
L3 Real Power
Total Real Power
L1 Reactive Power
L2 Reactive Power
L3 Reactive Power
Parameter No. Description
58 • reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 power terminal of the E300 relay Sensing Module
59
60
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 power terminal of the E300 relay Sensing Module
• reports the average voltage of the monitored L-N voltages
• When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Average L-N Voltage is calculated as follows:
– Average L-N Voltage = (L1-N Voltage + L2-N Voltage + L3-N Voltage) / 3
• When Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Average L-N Voltage is calculated as follows:
– Average L-N Voltage = (L1-N Voltage + L2-N Voltage) / 2
61
62
63
• reports the percentage of uneven voltage being supplied by the monitored power system
• Voltage Imbalance is defined by the following equation:
– Voltage Imbalance = 100% * (V
Average L-L Voltage, V a
/V a
); where V d
= Maximum L-L Voltage Deviation from the
• reports the voltage frequency in Hertz of the monitored power system from the E300 relay Sensing
Module
• reports the voltage phase rotation as ABC or ACB of the monitored power system from the E300 relay
Sensing Module.
The E300 relay’s power monitor diagnostics provides information on the power being supplied to the load. The power diagnostics include real power (kW), reactive power
(kVAR), apparent power (kVA), and power factor.
Table 32 - Power Monitor Parameters
Parameter No. Description
377
• allows the E300 relay to display the values of Parameters 64…75 as Kilowatts or Megawatts
– generally used for large medium voltage-based power systems,
64
65
• reports the real power for line 1 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale
(Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L1 Real Power is set to 0
• reports the real power for line 2 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale
(Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L2 Real Power is set to 0
66
67
68
69
70
• reports the real power for line 3 in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale
(Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L3 Real Power is set to 0
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, L3 Real Power is set to 0
• reports the total real power of the monitored power conductors in kW or MW depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Total Real Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Real Power = (L1 Real Power + L2 Real Power + L3 Real Power)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Total Real Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Real Power = (L1 Real Power + L2 Real Power)
• reports the reactive power for line 1 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L1 Reactive Power is set to 0
• reports the reactive power for line 2 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L2 Reactive Power is set to 0
• reports the reactive power for line 3 in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L3 Reactive Power is set to 0.
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, L3 Reactive Power is set to 0
158
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
Total Reactive Power
L1 Apparent Power
L2 Apparent Power
L3 Apparent Power
Total Apparent Power
L1 Power Factor
L2 Power Factor Power
L3 Power Factor
Total Power Factor
Energy Monitor
Parameter Name
kWh 10
9 kWh 10
6 kWh 10
3 kWh 10
0
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 7
Parameter No. Description
71
72
• reports the total Reactive power of the monitored power conductors in kVAR or MVAR depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Total Reactive Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Reactive Power = (L1 Reactive Power + L2 Reactive Power + L3 Reactive Power)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Total Reactive Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Reactive Power = (L1 Reactive Power + L2 Reactive Power)
• reports the apparent power for line 1 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L1 Apparent Power is set to 0
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
• reports the apparent power for line 2 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L2 Apparent Power is set to 0
• reports the apparent power for line 3 in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power
Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L3 Apparent Power is set to 0
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, L3 Apparent Power is set to 0
• reports the total apparent power of the monitored power conductors in kVA or MVA depending on the configuration value for Power Scale (Parameter 377)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Total Apparent Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Apparent Power = (L1 Apparent Power + L2 Apparent Power + L3 Apparent Power)
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Total Apparent Power is calculated as follows:
– Total Apparent Power = (L1 Apparent Power + L2 Apparent Power)
• reports the power factor for line 1 in percentage
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L1 Power Factor is set to 0
• reports the power factor for line 2 in percentage
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L2 Power Factor is set to 0
• reports the power factor for line 3 in percentage
• when Voltage Mode (Parameter 352) is set to any
Delta
base setting, L3 Power Factor is set to 0
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, L3 power factor is set to 0
• reports the total power factor of the monitored power conductors in percentage
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Three Phase
, Total Power Factor is calculated as follows:
• Total Power Factor = (L1 Power Factor + L2 Power Factor + L3 Power Factor) / 3
• when Single or Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to
Single Phase
, Total Power Factor is calculated as follows:
– Total Power Factor = (L1 Power Factor + L2 Power Factor) / 2
The E300 relay’s energy monitor diagnostics provides information on the electrical energy the load is consuming. The energy diagnostics include kWh, kVARh, kVAh, kW
Demand, kVAR Demand, and kVA Demand.
Table 33 - Power Monitor Parameters
Parameter No. Description
80
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents
XXX
,
000,000,000.000
kWh
81
82
83
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents 000,XXX,000,000.000 kWh
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents
000,000,
XXX
,000.000
kWh
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents
000,000,000,
XXX
.000
kWh
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
159
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics kVARh Generated 10
3 kVARh Generated 10
0 kVARh Generated 10
-3 kVARh Net 10
9 kVARh Net 10
6 kVARh Net 10
3 kVARh Net 10
0 kVARh Net 10
-3 kVAh 10
9 kVAh 10
6
Parameter Name
kWh 10
-3 kVARh Consumed 10
9 kVARh Consumed 10
6 kVARh Consumed 10
3 kVARh Consumed 10
0 kVARh Consumed 10
-3 kVARh Generated 10
9 kVARh Generated 10
6 kVAh 10
3 kVAh 10
0 kVAh 10
-3
160
Parameter No. Description
84
• reports a component of total real energy (kWh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kWh parameters
– represents
000,000,000,000.
XXX
kWh
85
86
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents
XXX
,
000,000,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents
000,
XXX
,000,000.000
kVARh
87
88
89
90
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents
000,000,
XXX
,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents
000,000,000,
XXX
.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy consumed (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Consumed parameters
– represents
000,000,000,000.
XXX
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents
XXX
,
000,000,000.000
kVARh
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents
000,
XXX
,000,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents
000,000,
XXX
,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents
000,000,000,
XXX
.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy generated (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Generated parameters
– represents
000,000,000,000.
XXX
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents
XXX
,
000,000,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents
000,
XXX
,000,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents
000,000,
XXX
,000.000
kVARh
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents
000,000,000,
XXX
.000
kVARh
99
100
101
102
103
104
• reports a component of total reactive energy net (kVARh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVARh Net parameters
– represents
000,000,000,000.
XXX
kVARh
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents
XXX
,
000,000,000.000
kVAh
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents
000,
XXX
,000,000.000
kVAh
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents
000,000,
XXX
,000.000
kVAh
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents
000,000,000,
XXX
.000
kVAh
• reports a component of total apparent energy (kVAh)
• multiply this value by 10 and add to the other kVAh parameters
– represents
000,000,000,000.
XXX
kVAh
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Parameter Name
kW Demand
Max. kW Demand kVAR Demand
Max kVAR Demand kVA Demand
Max kVA Demand
Analog Monitor
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 7
Parameter No. Description
105 • reports the average real energy usage in kW over a defined period
106
107
108
109
110
• reports the maximum kW Demand since the last Max kW Demand Reset command
• reports the average reactive energy usage in kVAR over a defined period
• reports the maximum kVAR Demand since the last Max kVAR Demand Reset command
• reports the average reactive energy usage in kVA over a defined period
• reports the maximum kVA Demand since the last Max kVA Demand Reset command
The E300 relay’s Analog I/O Expansion Modules scan up to three analog signals per module. This information can be used to monitor the following analog applications:
• Motor winding and bearing temperatures that are measured by RTD sensors
• Liquid, air, or steam flow
• Temperature
• Weight
• Vessel level
• Potentiometer
• PTC or NTC thermistor sensors
Table 34 - Analog Monitor Parameters
Parameter Name
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 1 Status
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02)
Analog Module 2 Status
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 3 Status
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01
Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02
Analog Module 4 Status
Parameter No. Description
111
112
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 00
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 01
113
123
114
115
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 1 – Input Channel 02
• reports the status of Analog Module 1
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 00
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 01
119
125
120
121
116
124
117
118
122
126
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 2 – Input Channel 02
• reports the status of Analog Module 2
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 00
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 01
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 3 – Input Channel 02
• reports the status of Analog Module 3
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 00
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 01
• reports the monitored value of Analog Module 4 – Input Channel 02
• reports the status of Analog Module 4
Trip / Warning History
The E300 relay provides a trip and warning history in which the last five trips and last five warnings are recorded into nonvolatile storage. A mask is available to limit which trip and warning events are logged to the history’s memory.
Trip History Codes
When the E300 relay issues a trip, the reason for the trip is recorded into the Trip
History.
Table 35 lists the codes that are available for the trip history records.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
161
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
162
Table 35 - Trip History Codes
29
30
31
32
33
34
27
28
25
26
21
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Trip History Code
0
50
51
44
49
52
53
41
42
43
35
36
37
38
39
40
Description
No Fault Conditions Detected
Motor current overload condition
Phase current Loss is detected in one of the motor phases
Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
Motor has not reached full speed by the end of Stall Enable Time
Motor current has exceeded the programmed jam trip level
Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
Phase to phase current imbalance detected
L1Current was below L1 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L2Current was below L2 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L3Current was below L3 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
Line voltage frequency is below trip level
Line voltage frequency has exceeded trip level
Sensing Module boot loader failed to load firmware
Sensing Module output enable open
Sensing Module missing interrupts
Sensing Module not calibrated
Sensing Module frame type failure
Sensing Module flash configuration failure
Sensing Module detected an overrun error
Sensing Module is not responding
Total Real Power (kW) is below trip level
Total Real Power (kW) has exceeded trip level
Under Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Over Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Under Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Over Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) is below trip level
Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) exceeded trip level
Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Test trip caused by holding the Test/Reset button for 2 seconds
PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
DeviceLogix defined trip was generated
The Stop button the Operator Station was pressed
Remote trip command detected
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
91
92
93
88
90
86
87
94
95
96
97
98
84
85
82
83
79
81
77
78
75
76
73
74
71
72
69
70
67
68
65
66
63
64
61
62
59
60
55
58
Trip History Code
54
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 7
Description
Maximum starts per hour exceeded
Hardware configuration fault. Check for shorts on input terminal
DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
Control Module CAN0 initialization failure
Control Module CAN0 bus failure
Control Module CAN1 initialization failure
Control Module CAN1 bus failure
Control Module ADC0 failure
Control Module detected too many CRC errors
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
External NVS Chip has detected communication timeout error
External NVS Chip has detected a CRC error
External NVS Chip has detected data out of range
Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Control Module installed does not match the expected type
Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
Operator Station installed does not match expected type
Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
Test Mode is engaged and current/voltage was detected
Heap memory could not be allocated
Vendor ID hardware fault
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
163
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
Parameter Name
Trip History 0
Trip History 1
Trip History 2
Trip History 3
Trip History 4
Trip History Mask
Current Trip History Mask
Voltage Trip History Mask
Power Trip History Mask
Control Trip History Mask
Analog Trip History Mask
Trip History Parameters
Table 36 - Trip History Parameters
Parameter No. Description
127
128
• reports the most recent trip event
• reports the second most recent trip event
129
130
• reports the third most recent trip event
• reports the fourth most recent trip event
131 • reports the fifth most recent trip event
You can decide which trip events are recorded into the E300 relay’s trip history by using the Trip History Masks
139
140
141
142
143
• allows you to select which current-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
• allows you to select which voltage-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
• allows you to select which power-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
• allows you to select which control-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
• allows you to select which analog-based trip events are recorded in the trip history
164
Warning History
When the E300 relay issues a warning, the reason for the warning is recorded into the
Warning History. Table 37 lists the codes that are available for the warning history
records.
Table 37 - Warning History Codes
21
22
33
34
35
36
37
18
19
16
17
20
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
3
5
Warning History Code Description
0
1
No Warning Conditions Detected
Approaching a motor current overload condition
Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
Motor current has exceeded the programmed jam warning level
Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
Phase to phase current imbalance detected
L1 Current was below L1 Undercurrent Warning Level
L2 Current was below L2 Undercurrent Warning Level
L3 Current was below L3 Undercurrent Warning Level
L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Warning Level
L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Warning Level
L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Warning Level
L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
Line voltage frequency is below the warning level
Line voltage frequency has exceeded warning level
Total Real Power (kW) is below warning level
Total Real Power (kW) has exceeded warning level
Under Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Over Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Under Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Metering and Diagnostics
Chapter 7
90
91
92
87
88
85
86
93
94
95
98
83
84
81
82
75
76
73
74
71
72
69
70
67
68
65
66
60
61
56
58
50
51
43
44
41
42
39
40
Warning History Code Description
38 Over Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Total Apparent Power (kVA) is below warning level
Total Apparent Power (kVA) exceeded warning level
Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
DeviceLogix defined warning was generated
Invalid parameter config. See parameters 38-39 for details
DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
Number of Starts Warning Level Exceeded
Operating Hours Warning Level Exceeded
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Control Module installed does not match the expected type
Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
Operator Station installed does not match expected type
Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
A hardware fault condition was detected
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
165
Chapter 7
Metering and Diagnostics
Parameter Name
Warning History 0
Warning History 1
Warning History 2
Warning History 3
Warning History 4
Warning History Mask
Current Warning History Mask
Voltage Warning History Mask
Power Warning History Mask
Control Warning History Mask
Analog Warning History Mask
Warning History Parameters
Table 38 - Warning History Parameters
Parameter No. Description
133
134
• reports the most recent warning event
• reports the second most recent warning event
135
136
• reports the third most recent warning event
• reports the fourth most recent warning event
137 • reports the fifth most recent warning event
You can decide which warning events are recorded into the E300 relay’s warning history by using the Warning History Masks
145
146
147
148
149
• allows you to select which current-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
• allows you to select which voltage-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
• allows you to select which power-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
• allows you to select which control-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
• allows you to select which control-based warning events are recorded in the warning history
Trip Snapshot
The trip snapshot populates the seven parameters within it, to offer some insight into the reason for the trip. This information is available until the unit trips/is tripped again, at which time it is overwritten. This includes doing a test trip.
Table 39 - Trip Snapshot Parameters
Parameter Name
Trip Snapshot L1-L2 Voltage
Trip Snapshot L2-L3 Voltage
Trip Snapshot L3-L1 Voltage
Trip Snapshot Total Real Power
Trip Snapshot Total Reactive Power
Trip Snapshot Total Apparent Power
Trip Snapshot Total Power Factor
Parameter No. Description
156
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T1 and T2 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module at the time of the most recent trip event
157
158
159
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T2 and T3 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module at the time of the most recent trip event
• reports the voltage in volts in reference to the T3 and T1 power terminals of the E300 relay Sensing Module at the time of the most recent trip event
• reports the total real power of the monitored power conductors in kW at the time of the most recent trip event
160
161
162
• reports the total Reactive power of the monitored power conductors in kVAR at the time of the most recent trip event
• reports the total apparent power of the monitored power conductors in kVA at the time of the most recent trip event
• reports the total power factor of the monitored power conductors in percentage at the time of the most recent trip event
166
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter
8
DeviceLogix™ Functionality
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay with firmware v5.000 and higher supports
DeviceLogix functionality, which is a logic engine that resides within the E300 relay.
You can select one of the preprogrammed DeviceLogix programs (see Operating
Modes on page 53 ) embedded in the E300 relay, or you can create a custom program in
function block or ladder logic. You can use the E300 Add-on Profile in Studio 5000 software or RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet™ software to program the device.
IMPORTANT
A DeviceLogix program only runs if the logic has been enabled, which can be done with E300 Add-on Profile in Studio 5000, RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, Connected
Component Workbench software, or the DeviceNet Configuration Terminal
(Cat. No. 193-DNCT).
Output Relay Overrides
Parameter Name
Communication Fault & Idle
Override
Network Fault Override
You can use DeviceLogix functionality to provide specific output relay performance under specific communication or network conditions. You can use the following parameters to allow a DeviceLogix program to override the E300 output relay configuration states controlled by the Communication Fault Modes and
Communication Idle Modes (see
Output Relay Configuration States on page 36 ).
Table 40 - Output Relay Override Parameters
Parameter No. Description
346
347
• defines whether or not DeviceLogix functionality controls the E300 output relays when either a communication fault
(missing I/O connection) or communication idle (network scanner or programmable logic controller is not in Run mode) condition exists
– If DeviceLogix functionality is enabled but Communication Fault & Idle Override is disabled, the operation of the E300 output relays is controlled by the Communication Fault Mode and Communication Idle Mode parameters if a communication fault or communication idle condition occurs.
– If DeviceLogix functionality and Communication Fault & Idle Override are both enabled, the E300 outputs relays are controlled by the DeviceLogix program regardless of the Communication Fault Mode or Communication Idle Mode.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is not enabled, the E300 output relays are controlled by the Communication Fault Mode or
Communication Idle Mode parameters if a communication fault or communication idle condition occurs – regardless of the override configuration of the Communication Fault & Idle Override parameter.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is transitioned from enable to disable, the E300 output relays immediately go to the appropriate Communication Fault Mode or Communication Idle Mode.
• defines whether or not DeviceLogix functionality controls the E300 output relays when either a duplicate node address is detected or a network bus off condition exists
– If DeviceLogix functionality is enabled but Network Fault is disabled, the operation of the E300 output relays is controlled by the Communication Fault Mode parameters if a network fault condition occurs.
– If DeviceLogix functionality and Network Fault are both enabled, the E300 outputs relays are controlled by the
DeviceLogix program regardless of the Communication Fault Mode.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is not enabled, the E300 output relays are controlled by the Communication Fault Mode parameters if a network fault condition occurs – regardless of the Network Fault Override configuration.
– If DeviceLogix functionality is transitioned from enable to disable, the E300 output relays immediately go to the appropriate Communication Fault Mode.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
167
Chapter 8
DeviceLogix™ Functionality
DeviceLogix Programming
DeviceLogix functionality has many applications and the implementation is only limited to the imagination of the programmer. Remember that the application of
DeviceLogix functionality is only designed to handle simple logic routines. Program
DeviceLogix functionality by using simple Boolean math operators (such as AND,
OR, NOT), timers, counters, and latches. Decision making is made by combining these Boolean operations with any of the available I/O. The inputs and outputs used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the E300 digital inputs and output relays. There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality, but some of the most common are listed below:
• Increased system reliability
• Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting
• Operation independent of PLC or Network status
• Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions
• Critical operations can be safely shut down through local logic
See publication RA-UM003 for more information about the capabilities of
DeviceLogix functionality and how to use the DeviceLogix program editor
(1)
168
(1) DeviceLogix programs have a maximum limit of 100 instructions.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Network Design
Chapter
9
EtherNet/IP Communication
This chapter provides the necessary instructions to successfully connect the E300™
Electronic Overload Relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module (Catalog Number
193-ECM-ETR) to an Ethernet network and configure it to communicate to an
EtherNet/IP scanner such as an Allen-Bradley Logix controller.
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module has dual Ethernet ports that function as an Ethernet switch with RJ45 ports to connect Ethernet cable CAT5 type or better to. Rockwell Automation offers a wide variety of Allen-Bradley Ethernet patch cables with its Bulletin 1585 line of Ethernet cables ( http:// ab.rockwellautomation.com/Connection-Devices/RJ45-Network-Media ).
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module supports a Star, Linear, and
Ring Ethernet topology. Figure 79
shows an example of a Star Ethernet Topology, in which all Ethernet nodes wire back to a central Ethernet switch, hub, or router.
Figure 79 - Star Ethernet Topology
Rockwell Automation also offers a line of managed and unmanaged
Allen-Bradley Ethernet Switches with its Stratix family of Ethernet switches. See http:/
/ab.rockwellautomation.com/Networks-and-Communication/Ethernet-IP-
Infrastructure for more information.
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module also supports an Ethernet Ring topology in which all Ethernet nodes are wired in series with one another until a
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
169
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication
complete network ring is made as shown in Figure 80
. The E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module supports Rockwell Automation's Device Level Ring (DLR) topology as a slave device in which the EtherNet/IP network continues to communicate if one of the network chains is disrupted.
Figure 80 - Ring Ethernet Topology
Set the IP Address
For information on Ethernet basics, including the following features, see Ethernet
Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication ENET-RM002 .
• Set network parameters
• DNS addressing
• Duplicate IP address detection
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module ships with DHCP enabled. You can set the network Internet Protocol (IP) address by using:
• The EtherNet/IP node address selection switches
• A Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)/Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) server (for example, the Rockwell Automation BOOTP-DHCP
Server Utility, which is included with Rockwell Software's RSLinx Classic software)
• A web browser and MAC scanner software
EtherNet/IP Node Address Selection Switches
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module comes with three node address selection switches that allow you to select the last octet for the IP address
192.168.1.xxx.
170
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Figure 81 - E300 Relay Node Addressing
Network Information
-MAC ID
-Serial Number
-Firmware Revision
EtherNet/IP Communication
Chapter 9
0
8
6 4
x100
2
Node Address
0
8
6
x10
4
2
0
8
6
x1
4
2
Node Address
001 - 254
255 - 887
889 - 999
888
000
Function
Set IP Address to 192.168.1.xxx
Set IP Address via DHCP or use static IP Address
Reset to factory defaults
Administration mode
EXAMPLE
When the left dial is set to 1, the middle dial is set to 2, and the right dial is set to 3, the resulting IP address is: 192.168.1.123.
When the node address selection switches are set to a value greater than 255 (excluding
888), the IP address is set to DHCP Enabled or programmed for a static IP address.A power cycle is required for any selection changes to take effect.
Assign Network Parameters via the BOOTP/ DHCP Utility
By default, the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module is DHCP Enabled.
The BOOTP/DHCP utility is a standalone program that is located in the
BOOTPDHCP Server folder accessed from the Start menu.
IMPORTANT
Before starting the BOOTP/DHCP utility, make sure you have the hardware MAC ID of the module, which is printed on the front of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module. The MAC ID has a format similar to: 00-0b-db-14-55-35.
This utility recognizes DHCP-enabled devices and provides an interface to configure a static IP address for each device. To assign network parameters via the BOOTP/
DHCP utility, perform this procedure:
1. Execute the BOOTP/DHCP software.
2. Choose Tool >Network Settings.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
171
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication
3. If appropriate for the network, type the subnet mask, gateway address, primary/ secondary server addresses, and domain name in their respective fields.
4. Click OK.
The Request History panel displays the hardware addresses of modules issuing
BOOTP or DHCP requests.
5. Double-click the MAC address of the module to be configured.
NOTE:
The MAC address is printed underneath the sliding front cover of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module. The format of the hardware address resembles: 00-0b-db-14-55-35
172
The New Entry window appears with the module's Ethernet Address (MAC).
6. Type the IP address, host name, and a module description.
7. Click OK.
8. Cycle power to the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
9. To permanently assign this configuration to the module: Select the module in the Relation List panel and click Disable BOOTP/DHCP.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Web Server
EtherNet/IP Communication
Chapter 9
When module power is cycled, it uses the assigned configuration and does not issue a
DHCP request.
If you do not click Disable BOOTP/DHCP, on a power cycle, the module clears the current IP configuration and again begins sending DHCP requests.
Assign Network Parameters Via a Web Browser and MAC Scanner
Software
If you do not have access to a DHCP software utility, you can assign network parameters via a web browser (for example, Microsoft® Internet Explorer) and Media
Access Control (MAC) scanner software (for example, MAC Scanner from Colasoft® - http://www.colasoft.com/). Follow these steps to configure the module using this method.
1. Locate and identify the MAC ID printed on the label of the E300 relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module. This address has a format that is similar to: 00-0b-db-14-55-35
2. Connect the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module to the same wide area network (WAN) as your personal computer.
3. Initiate the MAC scanner software.
4. Select the appropriate subnet to scan for available MAC addresses.
.
5. Scan the Subnet for all available MAC addresses
6. Identify the IP address assigned to the MAC ID of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module. The IP address has a format that is similar to
192.168.0.100.
As a security precaution, the embedded web server of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module is disabled by default. To temporarily enable the web server or to make it permanently available, you must enter into Administration Mode. To do this, set the rotary dials that are located underneath the front cover of the E300 relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module to 000 and cycle power. The device then goes online with the IP Address used at the time of the previous startup.
Web Server Security and System Password
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module’s web server allows you to view any diagnostic and parameter information. Security measures are built into the web server to deter a malicious user from making any unwanted EtherNet/IP system changes and
E300 configuration parameter edits. When you attempt to make an EtherNet/IP
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
173
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication system change or E300 configuration parameter edit, you are prompted to enter a user name and password.
174
Field
User name
Password
Firmware Revision 1.003 and Earlier
Default (case sensitive)
Administrator
<blank>
Firmware Revision 1.004 and Later
Default (case sensitive)
Administrator
<serial number of EtherNet/IP communication module>
You can find the module serial number on the label of the EtherNet/IP communication module.
We recommend that you change the password for user name
Administrator
. you can change the password on the password configuration web page.
Reset the System Password
If you forget or misplace the password for user name
Administrator
, you can restore the password to the factory default value by turning the rotary dials on the E300
EtherNet/IP Communication Module to 8-8-8 and cycling power. This resets all
EtherNet/IP communication settings and E300 configuration parameters back to the factory default values.
Permanently Enable the Web Server
In Administrative Mode, you can change any configuration parameter of the E300 relay, including permanently enabling the embedded web server, by following these steps:
1. Enter Administrative Mode by turning the rotary dials to 000 and cycle power on the E300 relay.
2. Access the web page.
3. Navigate to Administrative Settings->Network Configuration.
4. You are prompted for a user name and password. Enter "Administrator" for the user name, and enter the appropriate password.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
EtherNet/IP Communication
Chapter 9
5. Enable the Web Server Control and press Apply Changes.
View and Configure
Parameters via the Web
Server
The web server in the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module, when enabled, can view and configure parameters for the E300 relay. You can use the web interface to edit parameters for E300 relay if it is not being scanned by an EtherNet/IP scanner.
View Parameters
Follow the steps below to view parameters using the web interface of the E300 relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
1. Using a web browser, open the web page of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module by typing its IP address for the URL.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
175
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication
2. Navigate to the Parameters folder and select a parameter group. The example below shows the information from the Current Monitoring parameters.
3. To increase the update rate of the data being viewed, enter a faster update time in the refresh rate box shown below:
176
4. E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module web page displays up to 17 parameters per web page. If more than 17 parameters exist for a parameter group, use the navigation arrows to display the other parameters.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
EtherNet/IP Communication
Chapter 9
Edit Parameters
Follow the steps below to edit configuration parameters using the web interface of the
E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
1. Select a parameter group that contains programmable parameters, then click the Edit button. The value options appears.
2. Click the down arrow on the pull-down boxes to adjust fixed values and/or enter numerical values in the fields without an arrow to adjust the values.
3. Click Apply once all parameter edits have been completed. The E300 relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module downloads the new parameter values to the device.
4. A confirmation window appears. Press OK.
NOTE:
If you attempt to edit a configuration parameter when a Class 1 EtherNet/IP connection exists between an EtherNet/IP scanner and the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module, a message similar to the one shown below appears when the
Apply button is pressed.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
177
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication
Back up/Restore Parameters
With an E300 Series B Control Module and v7.xxx firmware installed, you have the option to back up or restore the device configuration parameters through the E300 web server interface. (Note: the backup/restore feature does not include any administrative parameters or DeviceLogix programming). To use this feature, perform the following steps:
1. Navigate to the target E300 device web server and select the Backup/Restore option along the left-hand menu.
178
2. To back up the current E300 parameter configuration: select Backup. The
Backup process completes in a few seconds and the web server then prompts you to save the corresponding *.JSON configuration file.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
EtherNet/IP Communication
Chapter 9
3. To restore a previous E300 parameter configuration: Browse to a valid E300 parameter configuration *.JSON file. Select Restore. The restoration process completes in a few seconds.
Integration with Logix-based
Controllers
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module supports two types of
EtherNet/IP communication.
• I/O data - Used for deterministic, data control with Logix-based controllers. I/
O tags are automatically assigned when you configure the E300 relay in a Logix project. The E300 relay also supports Automatic Device Configuration, in which the Logix-based controller manages device configuration parameters.
• Message (MSG) instructions - Used for non-deterministic data that is not critical for control. Use MSG instructions read and write data and have a lower priority than I/O data. For information on MSG instructions, see Logix5000
Controllers Messages Programming Manual, 1756-PM012 .
Configure an E300 Relay in a Logix Project
Use the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application to configure an E300 relay in a Logix project. Download and install the Add-on Profile. Download firmware, associated files
(such as AOP, DTM, and EDS), and access product release notes from only the
Product Compatibility and Download Center at http:// www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/pcdc.page
1. Go Online with the controller.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
179
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication
2. Right click on the Ethernet tree and select either Discover Modules or New
Module.
180
Option
Discover Modules
New Module
Description
Module discovery identifies the available devices on the specific EtherNet/IP network.
1. Select the preconfigured E300 relay that is on the EtherNet/IP network
2. Click Create
3. Upload the configuration data
New module lets you manually add a E300 relay offline to a Logix project.
1. Search for an E300 relay
2. Click Create
3. Enter a name for the E300 relay
4. Upload the configuration data
5. Select the preconfigured E300 relay that is on the EtherNet/IP network
If the upload is successful, a display appears indicating the success of this command.
Press OK to continue.
If the upload is not successful due to communication errors, a display appears indicating that there was an upload error and the device uses default settings. Click OK to continue. Identify and fix the reason for the communication error and press Upload again, or press Cancel to remove any module definition changes.
If the upload is not successful due to an E300 configuration trip, a display appears indicating that the profile is using its existing settings. Click OK to continue. Read parameters 38 and 39 from the E300 relay to determine the reason for the configuration trip. Fix the issue and press Upload again, or press Cancel to remove any module definition changes.
Access I/O Data
To access the data provided by the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module, navigate to the input tags.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
EtherNet/IP Communication
Chapter 9
To control the output relays or issue a remote reset command to the E300 relay, navigate to the output tags.
E-mail/Text
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module can send e-mail messages and text notifications for different trip and warning events using a Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol (SMTP) server.
The subject and body contents in the e-mail message is created from the:
• Type of trip or warning that is detected
• Device name
• Device description
• Device location
• Contact information
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
181
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication
EXAMPLE
E-mail Subject:
E300 Overload Relay has detected a fault
E-mail Body:
Fault Status:
Device Name: E300 Overload Relay
Device Description: Motor Starters
Device Location: Bay 6-U29
Contact Info: Contact Person [email protected]
The first word in the e-mail subject is the device name. If a device name is not configured, then the product name attribute from the identity object is used.
E-mail Configuration
To be able to send an e-mail, you must configure the IP address of the host name of a
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server and select notifications. Follow these steps to configure an e-mail notification.
1. In the web browser, enter the IP address of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module URL of the web browser.
2. Select Administrative Settings>Device Identity
3. Type the Device Identity information into the fields as described below and press Apply.
182
Device Name
Device Description
Device Location
The name of the E300 relay.
The description of the E300 relay.
The location of the E300 relay.
Contact Information
The contact information for the E300 relay.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
EtherNet/IP Communication
Chapter 9
4. Select Administrative Settings>E-Mail Configuration
5. Type the information into the e-mail notification fields as stated below.
Multiple e-mail addresses can be entered into the E-mail Recipient field by separating each e-mail address with a semicolon (;). The E-mail Recipient field is limited to 255 characters.
E-mail Recipient
E-Mail Sender
SMTP Server
SMTP Username
SMTP Password
SMTP Port
The e-mail address of the person who receives the notifications.
The e-mail address from which the notification is sent.
Consult with the network administrator for the SMTP server address.
Consult with the network administrator for the SMTP username.
Consult with the network administrator for the SMTP password.
Consult with the network administrator which SMTP port number to use. Port 25 is the most common SMTP port.
6. Check the desired notification time, fault conditions, and local conditions to be included in notification e-mails to the recipient. You can change these after the initial configurations.
7. Click Apply to accept the configuration
8. When an E300 relay event occurs, the e-mail message looks like the following:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
183
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication
Text Notifications
The E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module can send a text message to a wireless phone by e-mailing the wireless phone's service provider. The format for the text message is provided by the service provider and looks similar to the example formats below.
• AT&T™: 10-digit wireless phone [email protected]
• Sprint®: 10-digit wireless phone [email protected]
Limitations
Based on the functionality of the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module, there are some limitations on when the e-mails can be triggered.
• If two events occur at the same time, an e-mail is only sent for the most significant error.
• If the device has been configured to send an e-mail for a lower prioritized event and this event occurs at the same time as a higher prioritized event for which the device has not been programmed to send an e-mail, an e-mail is not sent for either event.
• The Clear e-mail is only sent when all events have been cleared and an event email has previously been sent.
184
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Notes:
EtherNet/IP Communication
Chapter 9
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
185
Chapter 9
EtherNet/IP Communication
186
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet Node
Commissioning
Chapter
10
DeviceNet Communication
This chapter provides the necessary instructions to connect the E300 Electronic
Overload Relay DeviceNet Communication Module (Catalog Number
193-ECM-DNT) to a DeviceNet network and configure it to communicate to a
DeviceNet master node such as an Allen-Bradley® 1756-DNB module.
The following recommendations are intended to deliver smooth startup and operation.
• Use the node commissioning tool in RSNetWorx™ when you modify the E300
Overload Relay node address.
• Verify that you have the most current configuration information before you save a RSNetWorx configuration file.
• If you intend to use the automatic device recovery (ADR) function of the
DeviceNet scanner, verify that the device configuration is correct before saving it to memory.
• The “Restore Device Defaults” button in RSNetWorx resets the E300 Overload
Relay node address setting to 63.
E300 Overload Relays are shipped with a default hardware node address (MAC ID) setting of 9-9 (node address 63) and the data rate set to Autobaud. Each device on a
DeviceNet network must have a unique node address, which can be set to a value from
0 to 63. Most DeviceNet systems use address 0 for the master device (Scanner). Leave node address 63 vacant for introduction of new slave devices. You can change the node address and data rate for E300 Overload Relays by using software or by setting the hardware switches that are on the front of each unit. While both methods yield the same result, it is a good practice to choose one method and use it consistently throughout the system.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
187
Chapter 10
DeviceNet Communication
Setting the Hardware Switches
Figure 82 - E300 Overload Relay DeviceNet Node Addressing
Network Information
-Serial Number
-Firmware Revision
188
Node Address
00…63
64…76
78…98
Node Address
Function
Set node address to xx
Software sets node address
Node Address
88
77
x10 x1
Function
Reset to factory defaults
Administration mode
For example, when the left dial is set to 0 and the right dial is set to 1, the resulting
DeviceNet node address is: 01.
For node address switch values in the range of 0 to 63, cycle power to the E300
Overload Relay to initialize the new setting.
Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet
Follow these additional steps for node address switch settings in the range of 64…76 and 78…98. To begin the configuration of an E300 Overload Relay using software, execute the RSNetWorx software and complete the following procedure. You must use
RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Revision 27.00.00 or later.
Recognizing the E300 Overload Relay Online
1. Launch the RSNetWorx software, then select Online from the Network pulldown menu.
2. Select the appropriate DeviceNet personal computer interface, then click OK.
TIP
You must configure the E300 DeviceNet drivers using RSLinx before they available to
RSNetWorx
3. If the RSNetWorx software gives notification to upload or download devices before viewing configuration, click OK to upload or download these devices.
4. RSNetWorx now browses the network and displays all nodes it has detected on the network. For some versions of RSNetWorx software, the E300 Overload
Relay EDS files may not be included. In this event, the device is identified as an
“Unrecognized Device”.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet Communication
Chapter 10
If the screen appears as shown, continue with
Building and Registering an EDS
5. If RSNetWorx software recognizes the device as an E300 Overload Relay (or
E3/E3 Plus in emulation mode), skip ahead to the following section – Using the
Node Commissioning Tool of RSNetWorx for DeviceNet.
You can also commission a node by using the DeviceNet Configuration
Terminal, Cat. No. 193-DNCT.
Building and Registering an EDS File
NOTE: If you are using DeviceLogix functionality, you must download the EDS file from https://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/networks/eds.page?
Perform the following steps to build and register the EDS file.
1. Right-click the Unrecognized Device icon. The Register Device menu appears.
2. Select Yes. The EDS Wizard appears.
3. Select Next, then Create an EDS File.
4. Select Next.
5. Select Upload EDS.
6. Select Next. The EDS Wizard screen appears:
7. (Optional) Type a value in the Catalog and File Description Text fields, then select Next.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
189
Chapter 10
DeviceNet Communication
8. On the input/output screen in the EDS Wizard, select the Polled checkbox, then enter a value of 8 for Input and 1 for Output.
190
9. Select Next. RSNetWorx uploads the EDS file from the E300 Overload Relay.
10. Select Next to display the icon options for the node.
11. Select the E300 Overload Relay icon, then click Change Icon.
12. Select OK after selecting the desired icon.
13. Select Next.
14. Select Next when you are prompted to register this device.
15. Select Finish.
After a short time, the RSNetWorx software updates the online screen by replacing the
Unrecognized Device with the name and icon given by the EDS file that you have registered.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet Communication
Chapter 10
Using the Node Commissioning Tool of RSNetWorx for DeviceNet
1. Select Node Commissioning from the Tools pull-down menu.
2. Select Browse.
3. Select the E300 Overload Relay that is located at node 01.
4. Select OK.
The Node Commissioning screen shows Current Device Settings entries that are completed. It also provides the current network baud in the New E300
Overload Relay Settings area.
Do not change the baud setting unless you are sure it must be changed.
5. Type the node address that you want in the New Device Settings section. In this example, the new node address is 01.
6. Select Apply.
When the new node address is successfully applied, the Current Device Settings section of the window updates. If an error occurs, check to see if the device is properly powered up and connected to the DeviceNet network.
7. Select Close to close the Node Commissioning window.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
191
Chapter 10
DeviceNet Communication
8. Select Single Pass Browse from the Network pull-down menu to update the
RSNetWorx software and verify that the node address is set correctly.
Produced and Consumed Assembly Configurations
The Input and Output Assembly format for the E300 Overload Relay is identified by the value in Output Assembly, Parameter 289, and Input Assembly, Parameter 290.
These values determine the amount and arrangement of the information communicated to the master scanner.
192
Selection of Input and Output Assemblies (Produced and Consumed Assemblies) defines the format of I/O message data that is exchanged between the E300 Overload
Relay and other devices on the DeviceNet network. The consumed information is used to command the state of the slave device outputs. Produced information typically contains the state of the inputs and current fault status of the slave device.
The default Consumed and Produced Assemblies are shown in Table 41
through
. For additional formats, refer to
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet Communication
Chapter 10
7
8
5
6
2
3
INT DINT 15
0
1
0
4
1
2
3
9
4
Table 41 - DeviceNet Input Assembly Instance 131
Instance 131—Basic Overload
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
Device Status 0
Device Status 1
Input Status 0
Input Status 1
Output Status
OpStation Status
Reserved
Average % FLA
Average Current
6 5 4 3
% Thermal Utilized
2 1 0
Member Size Param
5
6
7
2
3
0
1
4
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
16
32 46
19
1
50
16
17
20
21
18
Table 42 - DeviceNet Input Assembly Instance 131 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get —
Get —
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
Value
10
—
16
6
21 0F 00 25 14 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 15 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 10 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 11 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 12 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 13 00
8
6
21 0F 00 25 01 00
8
0
—
16
6
21 0F 00 25 32 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 2E 00
See data format above
20
“Basic Overload”
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
193
Chapter 10
DeviceNet Communication
Table 43 - DeviceNet Output Assembly Instance 144
2
3
Instance 131—Default Consumed Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
0 Output Status 0
NetworkStart 1
NetworkStart2
TripReset
EmergencyStop
1
0
RemoteTrip
Reserved
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X X X
1
PtDeviceIns
AnDeviceIns
5
X
4
X
3
X
HMILED1Green
HMILED2Green
HMILED3Green
HMILED3Red
HMILED4Red
Reserved
2
X
1
X
0
X
Member Size Path
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
13
14
2
3
0
1
4
16 Param 18
— Symbolic
— Symbolic
— Symbolic
— Symbolic
— Symbolic
— —
— Symbolic
— Symbolic
— Symbolic
— Symbolic
— Symbolic
— —
16
Symbolic
Symbolic
194
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet Communication
Chapter 10
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get —
Get —
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
—
—
—
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Table 44 - DeviceNet Output Assembly Instance 144 Attributes
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
Value
15
—
16
UINT
Packed EPATH
6
20 0F 00 25 12 00
UINT
UINT
1
14
Packed EPATH 6DH & “NetworkStart1”
UINT
UINT
1
14
Packed EPATH 6DH & “NetworkStart2”
UINT 1
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
10
69H & “TripReset”
1
UINT 14
Packed EPATH 6DH & “EmergencyStop”
UINT
UINT
1
11
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
6AH & “RemoteTrip”
3
0
—
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
UINT
UINT
1
13
Packed EPATH 6CH & “HMILED1Green”
UINT 1
UINT 13
Packed EPATH 6CH & “HMILED2Green”
UINT
UINT
1
13
Packed EPATH 6CH & “HMILED3Green”
UINT 1
UINT 11
Packed EPATH 6AH & “HMILED3Red”
UINT
UINT
1
11
Packed EPATH 6AH & “HMILED4Red”
UINT 3
0
—
16
12
6BH & “PtDeviceIns”
16
12
6BH & “AnDeviceIns”
See data format above
8
“E300 Consumed”
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
195
Chapter 10
DeviceNet Communication
Choose the size and format of the I/O data that is exchanged by the E300 Overload
Relay by selecting Input and Output Assembly Instance numbers. Each assembly has a given size (in bytes). This instance number is written to the Input Assembly and
Output Assembly parameters. The different instances/formats allow user programming flexibility and network optimization.
Mapping the Scanner to the Scan List
The Automap feature that is available in all Rockwell Automation scanners automatically maps the information. If you are not using the default I/O assemblies, you must change the values in the scan list.
To change the values, right-click on the E300 device and select Properties. Once the configuration window opens, navigate to the I/O Data tab to view the present device configuration.
Commissioning the
Protection Functions
This section describes the use of RSNetWorx for DeviceNet to configure the function settings of the E300 Overload Relay. The product should now be configured and communicating on the DeviceNet network. The last step is to program the overload setup parameters 171…177 according to the desired application requirements. You can do this by using software such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, another hand-held
DeviceNet tool, or the E300 Diagnostic Station.
1. Using the RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software, right-click on the E300 device and select properties. Navigate to the Parameters tab to view the present device configuration. You can view the parameters as a linear list or grouped according to their respective functions.
196
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet Communication
Chapter 10
You can change editable parameters by selecting them and altering the value that is needed, based on the motor overload application.
2. Once you have programmed all necessary parameters, use the appropriate radio
button to download the configuration to the E300 device. See page 9
for information about the complete parameter spreadsheet that is attached to this
PDF, which contains a description of each programmable parameter and its intended function.
DeviceLogix Interface in
RSNetWorx for DeviceNet
The DeviceLogix interface can be accessed from RSNetWorx. Right-click on the target
E300 device and select properties. Navigate to the DeviceLogix tab to being using
DeviceLogix. For additional details specific to DeviceLogix, DeviceLogix™
E3/E3 Plus Overload Emulation Mode
The E300 Overload Relay used with the Series B Control Module supports an E3
Plus™ overload relay emulation mode when it is attached to a DeviceNet communication module. This lets you reuse configuration parameters from the E3 Plus overload relay when you use configuration tools like ADR, the DeviceNet
Configuration Terminal (193-DNCT), and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
197
Chapter 10
DeviceNet Communication
To configure an E300 Overload Relay to operate in E3 Plus emulation mode, using
RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on the target E300 device and select properties. Navigate to the
Parameters tab to view the present device configuration.
2. Select parameter 300 to enable emulation mode.
3. Select the E3/E3 Plus device that is appropriate for the target application. The
E3/E3 Plus device selection must be compatible with the target hardware that is installed or a configuration error will be encountered (for example, a 1…5 A
E3/E3 Plus overload relay cannot be selected with a 60 A sensing module installed).
198
4. Delete the E300 component and add the respective E3/E3 Plus device to the corresponding DeviceNet network and configure it.
A single-pass browse of the DeviceNet network also detects the emulated E3/
E3 Plus device.
5. The E300 Overload Relay’s parameter set is now reduced considerably and is configurable as the selected E3/E3 Plus device (example shown is E3 Plus,
9…45 A).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet Communication
Chapter 10
To revert back to the native E300 device, note that the emulation mode parameter as an E3/E3 Plus device is parameter 303. Navigate to this parameter and select “disable” to return to E300 functionality. Then follow steps
4 … 5 to update the corresponding
DeviceNet network accordingly.
You can also use the E300 Diagnostic Station to modify the parameters referenced in this section. Once E3/E3 Plus emulation mode is activated, it is reflected in the
Diagnostic Station. In this mode, you cannot modify the full parameter set. This must be done using an appropriate DeviceNet interface such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
199
Chapter 10
DeviceNet Communication
Notes:
200
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Chapter
11
Firmware and EDS Files
This chapter provides detailed information about firmware compatibility among the various E300™ Electronic Overload Relay modules and provides instructions on how to update firmware for an E300 relay module.
Firmware Compatibility
The sensing, control, and communication modules of an E300 relay have their own firmware for the functionality of the module and its subsystems. You can update each module and its associated subsystems by using the ControlFLASH utility, which is the same utility that is used to download firmware into a Logix-based controller. The
ControlFLASH kits for E300 firmware system revisions v1.085, v2.085, v3.083, v4.083, and v5.082 use one command to update all E300 relay modules and subsystems for that specific system release. Consult the Product Compatibility and Download
Center to find the most current firmware revision.
Updating Firmware
Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product release notes from the Product Compatibility and Download Center at http:/
/www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/pcdc.page
.
After you have downloaded and installed the firmware, run the ControlFLASH application by selecting ControlFLASH from the Start menu.
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
File Installation
Before the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module is configured to communicate on an EtherNet/IP network, it must be registered to the software that configures the network (for example, Rockwell
A utomation RSLinx Classic and
RSNetWorx for EtherNet/IP software). Register the module by installing an EDS file.
You need the EDS file for the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module and
DeviceNet Communication Module. You can get the EDS files from one of two locations:
• Embedded in the module
• The Allen-Bradley EDS file download website.
Download the EDS File
Embedded in the Module
The EDS file for the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module is embedded within the module. Using RSLinx Classic, you can install the E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module's EDS file from the RSLinx Classic RSWho screen using these steps:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
201
Chapter 11
Firmware and EDS Files
1. Open RSLinx Classic and browse the EtherNet/IP network that has the E300 relay. It is identified with a yellow question mark. Right click on the unrecognized device and select "Upload EDS File from Device".
From the EDS File Download Site
The EDS file for the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module can also be downloaded from the Allen-Bradley EDS File download site. Using a web browser on the personal computer that is connected to the internet, you can download the EDS file by following these steps:
1. Type http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/ networks/eds.page? on the address line of the web browser.
2. Select EtherNet/IP as the network type, enter 193 for the Bulletin Number, and click Search.
202
3. Locate the EDS file for the E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module and download it to the personal computer.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Firmware and EDS Files
Chapter 11
Install the EDS File
1. Start the EDS Hardware Installation Tool located at Start>Programs>Rockwell
Software>RSLinx Tools and Add a new device
2. Using the EDS Wizard, install the downloaded E300 relay EtherNet/IP
Communication Module EDS file.
3. When finished, RSLinx Classic recognizes the newly registered E300 relay
EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
203
Chapter 11
Firmware and EDS Files
204
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Notes:
Firmware and EDS Files
Chapter 11
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
205
Chapter 11
Firmware and EDS Files
206
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Status Indicators
Chapter
12
Troubleshooting
This chapter helps you troubleshoot the E300™ Electronic Overload Relay using its advisory LEDs and diagnostic parameters.
ATTENTION:
Servicing energized industrial control equipment can be hazardous. Electrical shock, burns, or unintentional actuation of controlled industrial equipment may cause death or serious injury. For safety of maintenance personnel and others who may be exposed to electrical hazards associated with the maintenance activities, follow the local safetyrelated work practices (for example, the NFPA 70E, Part II, Electrical Safety for Employee Workplaces, in the United States) when working on or near energized equipment. Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices, procedures, and requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments. Do not work alone on energized equipment.
ATTENTION:
Do not attempt to defeat or override fault circuits. The cause of a fault indication must be determined and corrected before attempting operation. Failure to correct a control system or mechanical malfunction may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage due to uncontrolled machine system operation.
All E300 relay Communication Modules and Operator Station have two diagnostic status indicators: Power LED and Trip/Warn LED. You can use these diagnostic status indicators to help identify the state of the E300 relay and the reason for the trip or warning event.
Power
The E300 relay Power LED identifies the state of the E300 relay system.
Table 45 - Power LED for EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet Communication Modules
Blinking Green
Solid Green
Solid Red
Blinking Red
(1)
Blinking Green/Red
Device Ready/ Ready Mode
Device Active (Current Detected) / Run Mode
Device Error
Communication Error
CopyCat in Progress
(1) Available on Operator Station.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
207
Chapter 12
Troubleshooting
Module Status (MS)
explains the states of the Module Status (MS) LED of the E300 EtherNet/IP
Communication Module.
Table 46 - EtherNet/IP Communication Module Status Troubleshooting
LED Color
None
Green, Red, Not
Illuminated
Green
Green
Red
Red
State
—
Possible Cause
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is not receiving power.
Corrective Action
Check the control power connection on the A1 and A2 terminals of the
E300 Control Module.
Flashing (once) Normal
Flashing
Solid
Flashing
Solid
This is a normal power-up sequence.
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is not being scanned by the EtherNet/IP master.
Check the Ethernet scan list for the correct scanner configuration.
Normal operating state, the E300 EtherNet/IP
Communication Module is allocated to its master. No action is required.
One or more EtherNet/IP connections timed out. Reset the E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
The E300 Overload Relay is in a fault state.
Diagnostics test failed on power-up/reset.
Reset the E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module or verify the validity of the data in the configuration assembly.
Cycle power to the device. If the fault still exists, replace the device.
explains the states of the Module Status (MS) LED of the E300 DeviceNet
Communication Module.
Table 47 - DeviceNet Communication Module Status Troubleshooting
LED Color
None
Green, Red, Not
Illuminated
Green
Green
Red
State
—
Possible Cause
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module is not receiving power.
Flashing (once) Normal
Flashing
Solid
Normal (Program / Non-Run Mode)
Normal (Run Mode)
Flashing Recoverable Fault State
Red Solid Unrecoverable Fault State.
Corrective Action
Check the DeviceNet control power on the A1 and A2 terminals of the E300 Control
Module.
This is a normal power-up sequence.
The E300 Module is in Program/Non-run Mode where no I/O connection exists or an I/O connection exists while not in Run Mode.
The E300 Module is in Run Mode where I/O connection(s) is in Run State.
The E300 Module has been mis-configured and results in a fault condition.
The E300 Module has become inoperable due to a defective and/or intermittent component within the unit. In most instances, activating the Trip/Reset button will not remove this fault condition and the only way to recover from this condition is to replace the E300 module or identify/replace the faulty component(s). In some scenarios, pressing the Trip/Reset button may clear this fault condition. In this case, the cause for the fault is most likely to be environmentally related and therefore component replacement is not required.
208
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Troubleshooting
Chapter 12
Status LED
Network Status (NS)
Color
None
Green, Red,
Not Illuminated
Green
Green
Red
Link1 or Link2
Red
None
Green
Green
Status LED
Network Status (NS)
Color
None
Green, Red, Not
Illuminated
Green
Green
Red
Red
Network Status (NS)
identifies possible causes and corrective actions when troubleshooting the
E300 relay EtherNet/IP Communication Module.
Table 48 - EtherNet/IP Communication Module Network Status Troubleshooting
State
—
Possible Cause
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is not receiving power.
Corrective Action
Verify that the proper control voltage exists between terminals A1 and A2 on the E300 Control Module.
Flashing (once) Normal
Flashing
Solid
Flashing
Solid
—
Flashing
Solid
This is a normal power-up sequence.
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is online, but with no connections established.
Normal operating state and the E300 EtherNet/IP
Communication Module is allocated to a master.
One or more EtherNet/IP connections timed out.
Diagnostics test failed on power-up/reset. An internal fault exists.
Duplicate EtherNet/IP module address exists. Two modules cannot have the same address.
A fatal communication error occurred.
Check the EtherNet/IP master and its scan list for correct scanner configuration.
No action is required.
Reset the EtherNet/IP master device.
Cycle power to the unit. If the fault still exists, replace the unit.
Change the IP address to a valid setting and reset the device.
Check Ethernet media for proper installation.
The E300 EtherNet/IP Communication Module is not properly connected to an Ethernet network.
Check the Ethernet cabling to make sure it is properly installed.
The Ethernet network is properly connected.
No action is required.
Communication is occurring on the Ethernet network.
No action is required.
identifies possible causes and corrective actions when troubleshooting the
E300 relay DeviceNet Communication Module.
State
—
Possible Cause
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module is not receiving power.
Flashing (once) Normal
Flashing
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module is online but has no connections established to other nodes.
Solid
Flashing
Normal
One or more DeviceNet I/O connections timed out.
Solid
Table 49 - DeviceNet Communication Module Network Status Troubleshooting
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module has detected an error that has rendered it incapable of communicating on the network.
Corrective Action
Check the DeviceNet control power on the A1 and A2 terminals of the E300 Control Module.
This is a normal power-up sequence.
The E300 Module may require commissioning due to configuration missing, incomplete, or incorrect.
The E300 DeviceNet Communication Module is allocated to a master.
Verify configuration and/or reset DeviceNet master.
Verify configuration and/or reset DeviceNet master.
Cycle power to the E300 Module. If the fault still exists, identify/replace the faulty component(s). Change the node address to a valid setting and reset the E300
Module. Verify integrity of the DeviceNet network and corresponding cabling to ensure proper installation.
Trip/Warn
The E300 relay Power LED identifies the reason for the trip or warning event. The
E300 relay displays a long and short blinking pattern to identify the reason for the trip or warning event.
Table 50 - Trip / Warn LED for EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet Communication Modules
Blinking Red
Blinking Yellow
Trip Event
Warning Event
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
209
Chapter 12
Troubleshooting
lists the blink patterns for the E300 relay trip and warning events.
Table 51 - Blink Patterns for Trip/Warn Events
Current
Voltage
Power
Code
Overload
Phase Loss
Ground Fault Current
Stall
Jam
Underload
Current Imbalance
L1 Under Current
L2 Under Current
L3 Under Current
L1 Over Current
L2 Over Current
L3 Over Current
L1 Line Loss
L2 Line Loss
L3 Line Loss
Under Voltage
Over Voltage
Voltage Imbalance
Phase Rotation Mismatch
Under Frequency
Over Frequency
Under kW
Over kW
Under kVAR Consumed
Over kVAR Consumed
Under kVAR Generated
Over kVAR Generated
Under kVA
Over kVA
Under PF Lagging
Over PF Lagging
Under PF Leading
Over PF Leading
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
0
1
Long Blink Pattern
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
9
6
7
10
11
12
4
5
2
3
6
1
4
5
2
3
16
1
Short Blink Pattern
1
2
3
6
7
4
5
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
210
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Reset a Trip
Troubleshooting
Chapter 12
Control
Code
Test
PTC
DeviceLogix
Operator Station
Remote Trip
Blocked Start
Hardware Fault
Configuration
Option Match
Feedback Timeout
Expansion Bus
Number Of Starts
Operating Hours
Nonvolatile Memory
Test Mode
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 1 - Input Channel 02
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 2 - Input Channel 02
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 3 - Input Channel 02
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 00
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 01
Analog Module 4 - Input Channel 02
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
Long Blink Pattern
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
9
10
7
8
11
12
5
6
3
4
1
2
14
15
Short Blink Pattern
1
4
5
2
3
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
ATTENTION:
Resetting a trip does not correct the cause for the trip. Take corrective action before you reset the trip.
The E300 relay trip condition can be reset by taking one of the following actions:
• Actuating the Blue Trip/Reset button on the E300 relay Communication
Module
• Actuating the Reset button on the E300 relay Operator Station
• Setting the Trip Reset bit in the E300 relay’s Output Assembly via the communication network
• Actuating a reset signal to one of the assigned digital inputs
• Setting Overload Reset Mode (Parameter 173) to “Automatic” to allow the unit to automatically reset after an overload trip
• Setting Trip Reset (Parameter 163) to a value of 1, “Trip Reset”
IMPORTANT
An overload trip cannot be reset until the value of Percent Thermal Capacity Utilized
(Parameter 1) is below the value set in Overload Reset Level (Parameter 174).
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
211
Chapter 12
Troubleshooting
Trip/Warn LED
Troubleshooting
Trip Description
Test Trip
Overload
Phase Loss
Ground Fault
Stall
Jam
PTC
Current Imbalance
Nonvolatile Storage
Fault
Hardware Fault
Configuration Fault
Remote Trip
Total Starts Warning
Possible Cause
1. Operation of the Test/Reset
1. Motor overloaded
2. Improper parameter settings
1. Missing supply phase
2. Poor electrical connection
Corrective Action
1. Operate the Test/Reset button to clear
1. Check and correct source of overload (load, mechanical transmission components, motor bearings).
2. Set parameter values to match the motor and application requirements.
1. Check for open line (for example, blown fuse).
2. Check all power terminations from the branch circuit-protecting device down to the motor for proper tightness. Make sure that the overload connection to the contactor is secure.
3. Inspect contactor for proper operation.
4. Single-phase applications require that Single/Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to “single phase”.
3. Contactor operation
4. Improper parameter setting
1. Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
2. Motor winding insulation is decayed
3. Foreign Object short
4. External ground fault sensor (core balance current transformer) has improper connection
1. Motor has not reached full speed by the end of the Stall Enabld Time (Parameter
249)
1. Check power conductors and motor windings for low resistance to ground.
2. Check motor winding insulation for low resistance to ground.
3. Check for foreign objects.
4. Check cable connections.
1. Check for source of stall (for example, excessive load, or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Improper parameter settings
1. Starts Counter (Parameter 29) is equal to or greater than the value set in Total Starts
(Parameter 207)
2. Stall Enabled Time (Parameter 249) is set too low for the application. Check to make sure that FLA Setting
(Parameter 171) is set correctly.
1. Motor current has exceeded the programmed jam level
3. Illegal configuration value
1. Contact closure of remote sensor (for example, vibration switch).
1. Check for the source of the jam (i.e., excessive load or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Improper parameter settings
1. Motor stator windings overheated
4. Contactor or circuit breaker operation
1. Firmware Downgrade corrupted:
Nonvolatile memory
2. Internal product failure
2. Jam Trip Level (Parameter 253) is set too low for the application. Check to make sure that FLA Setting
(Parameter 171) is set correctly.
1. Check for source of motor overtemperature (for example, overload, obstructed cooling, high ambient temperature, excessive starts/hour).
2. Thermistor leads short-circuited or broken 2. Inspect thermistor leads for short-circuit or open
1. Imbalance in incoming power 1. Check power system (for example, blown fuse).
2. Motor winding imbalance
3. Motor idling
2. Repair motor, or if acceptable, raise value of Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261), CI Trip Level
3. Raise value of Current Imbalance Trip Level (Parameter 261) to an acceptable level.
4. Inspect contactor and circuit breaker for proper operation.
1.Execute the Clear Command to the operating Statistics, History Logs, and % TCU
1. Firmware of sensing module is not compatible with control module firmware
2. Hardware configuration failure
2. Consult the factory.
1. Verify firmware revisions of control module and sensing module
2. Update firmware of control module to v2.0 or higher
3. Consult the factory.
4. Verify that the Sensing, Control, and Communication Module are connected properly.
5. Verify that connection pins between sensing module and control module are not bent.
1. Single/Three Phase (Parameter 176) is set to "Single Phase" and current is being sensed in phase L3 during motor operation.
2. Operating Mode "Overload (Network)" does not have an assigned Trip Relay
1. For three-phase applications, Single/Three Phase (Parameter 176) should be set to “Three-Phase”; for singlephase applications, verify that current is flowing through L1 and L2 only.
2. Verify that one of the Output Assignments (Parameters 202…204) is configured as a "Trip Relay"
3. Review Invalid Configuration Parameter (Parameter 38) and Invalid Configuration Cause (Parameter 39) to identify which configuration parameter is illegal and the reason why.
1. Take corrective action to address the issue that caused the sensor to actuate.
2. Check sensor for proper operation.
3. Check wiring.
1. Set Clear Command (Parameter 165) to "Clear Operating Statistics" to reset Starts Counter (Parameter 29)
212
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Troubleshooting
Chapter 12
Trip Description
Total Operating
Hours Warning
Blocked Start
Possible Cause
1. Operating Time (Parameter 28) is equal to or greater than the value set in Total
Operating Hours (Parameter 208)
1. The number of starts count within the past hour period equals the value set in the
Starts Per Hour (Parameter 205)
2. The time expired since the most recent start is less than the value set in the Starts
Interval (Parameter 206)
Corrective Action
1. Clear Command (Parameter 165) to "Clear Operating Statistics" to reset Operating Time (Parameter 28)
1. Check Time to Start (Parameter 31) and wait that amount of time, or change the configuration to allow more starts/hour.
2. Check Time to Start (Parameter 31) and wait that amount of time, or change the configuration to shorten the interval between starts.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
213
Chapter 12
Troubleshooting
214
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix
A
Wiring Diagrams
E300 Wiring Configurations
The following pages illustrate various wiring configurations for the E300™ Electronic
Overload Relay
Figure 83 - Delta Configuration with Two Potential Transformers (Open Delta)
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L2
T2
L3
T3
L1
T1
S1
S2
Open Delta
Potential
Transformer
Delta Load
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
215
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Figure 84 - Wye Configuration with Two Potential Transformers (Open Delta)
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L1
T2
L3
T3
T1
L2
S1
S2
Open Delta
Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
216
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
Figure 85 - Grounded B Phase Configuration With Two Potential Transformers (Open Delta)
Grounded B Phase
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L2
T2
L3
T3
L1
T1
S1
S2
Delta Load
Open Delta
Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
217
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 86 - Delta Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Delta-to-Delta)
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
L1
T1
Delta to Delta Potential
Transformer
Delta Load
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
218
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
Figure 87 - Wye Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Delta-to-Delta)
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
Delta to Delta Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
219
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Figure 88 - Delta Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Wye-to-Wye)
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L3
T3
S1
L2
T2
S2
L1
T1
Delta Load
Wye to Wye Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
220
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
Figure 89 - Wye Configuration with Three Potential Transformers (Wye-to-Wye)
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
S1
S2
L3
T3
L1
T1
L2
T2
Wye to Wye Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
221
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Delta Load
Figure 90 - Delta Configuration with Wye-to-Delta Potential Transformers
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L3
T3
S1
L2
T2
S2
L1
T1
Wye to Delta Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
222
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
Figure 91 - Wye Configuration with Wye-to-Delta Potential Transformers
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
L1
T1
L2
10 M
10 M
10 M
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Wye to Delta Potential
Transformer
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
223
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Delta Load
Figure 92 - Delta Configuration with Delta-to-Wye Potential Transformers
Delta Source
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
L1
T1
Delta to Wye Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
224
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Wye Load
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Figure 93 - Wye with Delta-to-Wye Potential Transformers
Wye Source
Grounded or ungrounded neutral
Wiring Diagrams
Appendix A
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
Signal filter and short-circuit protection
L1
T1
L2
T2
L3
T3
S1
S2
Delta to Wye Potential
Transformer
10 M
10 M
10 M
CT Sensing Module
V1
V2
V3
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
225
Appendix A
Wiring Diagrams
Notes:
226
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix
B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay’s EtherNet/IP Communication Module supports the following Common Industrial Protocol (CIP).
Table 52 - CIP Object Classes
0x0009
0x000A
0x000F
0x0010
0x001E
0x0029
0x002B
0x002C
Class
0x0001
0x0002
0x0003
0x0004
0x0005
0x0008
0x004E
0x004F
0x008B
0x0097
0x0098
0x00C2
Object
Identity
Message Router
DeviceNet
Assembly
Connection
Discrete Input Point
Discrete Output Point
Analog Input Point
Parameter Object
Parameter Group Object
Discrete Output Group
Control Supervisor
Acknowledge Handler
Overload Object
Base Energy Object
Electrical Energy Object
Wall Clock Time Object
DPI Fault Object
DPI Warning Object
MCC Object
Identity Object — CLASS CODE 0x0001
The instances of the Identity Object in Table 53 are supported:
Table 53 - Identity Object Instances
2
3
Instance
1
Name
Operating System Flash
Boot code Flash
Sensing Module
Revision Attribute
The firmware rev of the Control firmware stored in flash memory
The firmware rev of the Boot Code stored in flash memory
The firmware rev of the Sensing Module firmware
The class attributes in Table 54
are supported for the Identity Object:
Table 54 - Identity Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID
1
Access Rule
Get
Name
Revision
Data Type
UINT
Value
1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
227
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Instance 1 of the Identity Object contains the attributes in
:
Table 55 - Identity Object Instance 1 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Vendor
Device Type
Product Code
Revision
Major Revision
Minor Revision
Status
Data Type Value
UINT 1 = Allen-Bradley
UINT
UINT
Structure of:
USINT
USINT
3
651
Firmware revision of the Control firmware
WORD
Bit 0 – 0=not owned; 1=owned by master
Bit 2 – 0=Factory Defaulted; 1=Configured
Bits 4-7 – Extended Status (see Table 56 )
Bit 8 – Minor Recoverable fault
Bit 9 – Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 – Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 – Major Unrecoverable fault unique number for each device Serial Number UDINT
Product Name
String Length
ASCII String
Structure of:
USINT
STRING
“193-EIO Application”
8
9
Get
Get
State
Configuration
USINT
Consistency Value UINT
See CIP Common Spec
16 bit CRC or checksum of all data included in the following data sets:
Parameter included in the configuration assembly
MCC Object configuration data
DeviceLogix program data
Base Energy Object attribute 16
Table 56 - Extended Device Status Field (bits 4-7) in “Status” Instance Attribute 5
5
6
3
4
7
1
2
Value
0
Description
Self-Testing or Unknown
Firmware Update in Progress
At least one faulted I/O connection
No I/O connections established
Nonvolatile Configuration bad
Major Fault – either bit 10 or bit 11 is true (1)
At least one I/O connection in run mode
At least one I/O connection established, all in idle mode
228
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
Instance 2 of the Identity Object contains the attributes in
:
Table 57 - Identity Object Instance 2 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Vendor
Device Type
Product Code
Revision
Major Revision
Minor Revision
Status
Serial Number
Product Name
String Length
ASCII String
State
Configuration
Data Type Value
UINT 1 = Allen-Bradley
UINT
UINT
Structure of:
USINT
USINT
3
651
Firmware revision of the Boot Code
WORD
Bit 0 – 0=not owned; 1=owned by master
Bit 2 – 0=Factory Defaulted; 1=Configured
Bits 4-7 – Extended Status (see Table 56 )
Bit 8 – Minor Recoverable fault
Bit 9 – Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 – Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 – Major Unrecoverable fault unique number for each device UDINT
Structure of:
USINT
STRING
USINT
“193-EIO Boot Code”
Consistency Value UINT
See CIP Common Spec
16 bit CRC or checksum of all data included in the following data sets:
Parameter included in the configuration assembly
MCC Object configuration data
DeviceLogix program data
Base Energy Object attribute 16
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
229
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Instance 3 of the Identity Object contains the attributes in
:
Table 58 - Identity Object Instance 3 Attributes
1
2
Attribute
ID
3
Access
Rule
Get
Get
Get
4
5
6
7
8
9
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Name Data Type Value
Vendor
Device Type
Product Code
Revision
Major Revision
Minor Revision
UINT
UINT
UINT
Structure of:
USINT
USINT
1 = Allen-Bradley
3
651
Firmware revision of the Sensing Module firmware
Status
Serial Number
Product Name
String Length
ASCII String
State
WORD
Bit 0 – 0=not owned; 1=owned by master
Bit 2 – 0=Factory Defaulted; 1=Configured
Bits 4-7 – Extended Status (see Table 56 )
Bit 8 – Minor Recoverable fault
Bit 9 – Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 – Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 – Major Unrecoverable fault unique number for each device
Configuration
UDINT
Structure of:
USINT
STRING
USINT
Consistency Value UINT
“193-EIO Sensing Module”
See CIP Common Spec
16 bit CRC or checksum of all data included in the following data sets:
Parameter included in the configuration assembly
MCC Object configuration data
DeviceLogix program data
Base Energy Object attribute 16
The common services in
Table 59 are implemented for the Identity Object.
Table 59 - Identity Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x05
Implemented for:
Class
No
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Reset
Message Router — CLASS CODE 0x0002
No class or instance attributes are supported. The message router object exists only to rout explicit messages to other objects.
Assembly Object — CLASS CODE 0x0004
The class attributes in Table 60
are supported for the Assembly Object:
Table 60 - Assembly Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID
2
Access Rule
Get
Name
Max. Instance
Data Type
UINT
Value
199
230
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
The static assembly instance attributes in Table 61 are supported for each assembly
instance.
Table 61 - Assembly Instance Attributes
3
4
100
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1 Get
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
2 Get
Member Data
Description
UINT
Member Path Size UINT
Member Path
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT Array of CIP paths
Packed EPATH
Value
Size of Member Data in bits
Size of Member Path in bytes
Member EPATHs for each assembly instance
Conditional Data
Get
Get
Size
Name String
Array of BYTE
UINT
STRING
Number of bytes in attribute 3
are implemented for the Assembly Object.
Table 62 - Assembly Object Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
Yes
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
summarizes the instances of the Assembly Object that are implemented:
Table 63 - Assembly Object Instance Summary
120
144
198
199
Inst
2
50
100
Type
Consumed
Produced
Produced
Config
Consumed
Produced
Produced
Name
Trip Reset Cmd
Trip Status
DataLinks Object
Configuration
E300 Consumed
Current Diags
All Diags
Description
Required ODVA Consumed Instance
Required ODVA Produced Instance
8 Datalinks Produced Assembly
Configuration Assembly
Default Consumed Assembly
Produced Assembly with Current Diagnostics Only
Default Produced Assembly
Instance 2
summarizes Attribute 3 Format. For additional information regarding I/O assemblies, see
.
Table 64 -
Instance 2 — Basic Overload Output Assembly from ODVA Profile
Byte
0
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
Fault Reset
Bit 1 Bit 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
231
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Table 65 - Instance 2 Attributes
Attribute
ID
1
Access
Rule
Get
2
3
4
100
Get
Set
Get
Get
Member
Index
Name
0
1
Number of Members in Member
List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
Data Type Value
UINT 2
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
2
0
UINT
UINT
1
12
Packed EPATH 6BH and “Fault Reset”
UINT See data format above
UINT 1
SHORT_STRING “Trip Reset Cmd”
Instance 50
summarizes Attribute 3 Format:
Table 66 - Instance 50 — Basic Overload Input Assembly from ODVA Overload Profile
Byte
0
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Tripped
Table 67 - Instance 50 Attributes
Attribute
ID
1
Access
Rule
Get
Member
Index
Name
2
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
0
Data Type Value
Number of Members in Member List UINT
Member List Array of STRUCT
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
UINT
UINT
1
1
8
Packed EPATH 67H and “Tripped”
UINT See data format above
Size
Name
UINT 1
SHORT_STRING “Trip Status”
232
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 2
shows Attribute 3 Format and Attribute 2 Member List for revision 2 of the assembly.
21
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
8
9
10
23
24
25
26
27
28
Table 68 - Instance 120 — Configuration Assembly
3
4
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 ConfigAssyRev = 2
1
0
Reserved
2
1 FLASetting
5
2 FLA2Setting
8 7 6 5
SetOperatingMode
4 3
6
7
3
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
TripClass
OLPTCResetMode
SingleOrThreePh
GFFilter
GFMaxInghibit
PhaseRotTrip
PowerScale
Reserved
OLResetLevel
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
OLWarningLevel
TripEnableI
WarningEnableI
TripEnableV
WarningEnableV
TripEnableP
WarningEnableP
TripEnableC
WarningEnableC
TripEnableA
WarningEnableA
TripHistoryMaskI
WarnHistoryMaskI
TripHistoryMaskV
WarnHistoryMaskV
TripHistoryMaskP
WarnHistoryMaskP
TripHistoryMaskC
WarnHistoryMaskC
TripHistoryMaskA
WarnHistoryMaskA
MismatchAction
29
14
SensingModuleTyp
ControlModuleTyp
2 1 0 Size (bits) Param
16
8
8
1100
195
1102
32 171
32
8
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
16
2
8
1
1
1
1
8
1
1
177
143
149
233
221
222
146
141
147
142
148
193
139
145
140
191
186
192
187
189
184
190
185
1101
174
175
183
247
248
364
377
172
173
176
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
233
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
234
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
30
31
32
33
15
X X X
AnalogMod1Type
AnalogMod2Type
AnalogMod3Type
AnalogMod4Type
Reserved
16
OutCAssignment
InPt03Assignment
34
17
X X X
18
19
20
21
43
44
45
46
22
23
49
50
51
52
47
48
24
25
26
53
35
38
39
36
37
40
41
42
Reserved
StartsInterval
PMTotalStarts
PMOperatingHours
FeedbackTimeout
TransitionDelay
InterlockDelay
GFInhibitTime
GFWarningDelay
GFTripLevel
GFWarningLevel
PLTripDelay
Reserved
StallTripLevel
JamTripDelay
JamTripLevel
JamWarningLevel
ULTripDelay
ULWarningLevel
X
X
X X
OuBAssignment
Reserved
X
InPt02Assignment
ActFLA2wOutput
EmergencyStartEn
X
7
X
X
6
X
5
X
4
X
X
StartsPerHour
GroundFaultType
GFTripDelay
PLInhibitTime
StallEnabledTime
JamInhibitTime
ULInhibitTime
ULTripLevel
X
OutAAssignment
InPt01Assignment
InPt05Assignment
X
3 2 1
OperStationType
DigitalMod1Type
DigitalMod2Type
DigitalMod3Type
DigitalMod4Type
X
X X
0
X
Language
InPt00Assignment
InPt04Assignment
8
8
8
8
16
8
8
16
16
16
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
16
8
8
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
4
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
Size (bits) Param
4 224
225
226
227
228
N/A
212
202
203
229
230
231
232
206
207
208
213
216
N/A
205
N/A
199
200
201
209
204
196
197
198
239
240
249
N/A
250
251
252
253
243
245
244
246
214
215
241
242
254
255
256
257
258
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
69
73
74
75
76
77
70
71
72
56
57
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
54
27
CITripDelay
55
28
CIWarningLevel
CTPrimary
CTSecondary
58
29
L1UCTripDelay
59
L1UCWarningLevel
60
30
L2UCTripLevel
61
L3UCTripDelay
62
31
L3UCWarningLevel
63
L1OCTripDelay
64
32
L1OCWarningLevel
65
L2OCTripLevel
66
33
L3OCTripDelay
67
L3OCWarningLevel
68
34
L1LossTripDelay
35
36
37
38
L3LossTripDelay
Datalink0
Datalink1
Datalink2
Datalink3
Datalink4
Datalink5
Datalink6
Datalink7
8 7 6
CIInhibitTime
CITripLevel
5
UCInhibitTime
L1UCTripLevel
L2UCTripDelay
L2UCWarningLevel
L3UCTripLevel
OCInhibitTime
L1OCTripLevel
L2OCTripDelay
L2OCWarningLevel
L3OCTripLevel
LineLossInhTime
L2LossTripDelay
4 3 2 1 0
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
16
8
8
8
8
8
8
16
8
8
16
8
8
Size (bits) Param
8 259
260
261
262
263
268
269
270
271
264
265
266
267
294
295
296
288
291
292
293
297
298
284
285
286
287
280
281
282
283
276
277
278
279
272
273
274
275
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
235
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
OutPt00PrFltAct
OutPt00PrFltVal
OutPt00ComFltAct
OutPt00ComFltVal
OutPt00ComIdlAct
78
OutPt00ComIdlVal
OutPt01PrFltAct
OutPt01PrFltVal
X
X
X
X
79
39
X
X
X
OutPt02ComIdlAct
OutPt02ComIdlVal
OutDig1PrFltAct
OutDig1PrFltVal
OutDig1ComFltAct
OutDig1ComFltVal
OutDig1ComIdlAct
OutDig1ComIdlVal
X
X
X
X
80
40
X
X
X
OutDig3ComFltAct
OutDig3ComFltVal
OutDig3ComIdlAct
OutDig3ComIdlVal
OutDig4PrFltAct
OutDig4PrFltVal
OutDig4ComFltAct
OutDig4ComFltVal
X
X
X
81
82
83
41
Reserved
PtDevOutCOSMask
PTPrimary
PTSecondary
8
X
X
X
7 6 5 4
X
X
X
OutPt01ComFltAct
OutPt01ComFltVal
OutPt01ComIdlAct
OutPt01ComIdlVal
OutPt02PrFltAct
OutPt02PrFltVal
OutPt02ComFltAct
OutPt02ComFltVal
X
X
X
OutDig2PrFltAct
X
OutDig2PrFltVal
OutDig2ComFltAct
OutDig2ComFltVal
OutDig2ComIdlAct
OutDig2ComIdlVal
OutDig3PrFltAct
OutDig3PrFltVal
X
X
X
X
OutDig4ComIdlAct
OutDig4ComIdlVal
CommOverride
NetworkOverride
X
3 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Size (bits) Param
1 304
305
306
307
308
313
314
315
316
309
310
311
312
329
330
331
332
325
326
327
328
321
322
323
324
317
318
319
320
1
1
1
1
1
4
16
16
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
343
344
345
346
347
N/A
350
353
354
337
338
339
340
341
342
333
334
335
336
236
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
99
103
104
105
106
107
100
101
102
108
88
89
90
91
86
87
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
84
42
PhRotInhibitTime
85
43
UVTripDelay
UVTripLevel
UVWarningLevel
44
45
OVTripDelay
OVTripLevel
OVWarningLevel
VUBTripDelay
92
46
VUBWarningLevel
93
UFTripDelay
94
47
UFWarningLevel
95
OFTripDelay
96
48
OFWarningLevel
97
NumberOfPeriods
98
49
UWTripDelay
OWTripDelay
50 UWTripLevel
51
52
53
UWWarningLevel
OWTripLevel
OWWarningLevel
54
UVARCTripDelay
OVARCTripDelay
55 UVARCTripLevel
56
57
58
UVARCWarnLevel
OVARCTripLevel
OVARCWarnLevel
8 7 6
VoltageMode
UVInhibitTime
OVInhibitTime
VUBInhibitTime
VUBTripLevel
UFInhibitTime
UFTripLevel
OFInhibitTime
OFTripLevel
DemandPeriod
UWInhibitTime
OWInhibitTime
5
UVARCInhibitTime
OVARCInhibitTime
4 3 2 1 0
32
32
32
32
32
32
8
8
8
8
32
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
16
8
8
16
16
8
8
16
8
8
Size (bits) Param
8 352
363
355
356
357
362
365
366
367
358
359
360
361
379
382
383
376
426
427
378
372
373
374
375
368
369
370
371
32 380
385
386
387
390
391
388
381
384
389
392
393
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
237
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
238
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
129
133
134
135
136
137
130
131
132
138
123
124
125
126
127
120
121
122
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
118
59
UVARGTripDelay
119
OVARGTripDelay
60 UVARGTripLevel
61
62
63
UVARGWarnLevel
OVARGTripLevel
OVARGWarnLevel
128
64
UVATripDelay
OVATripDelay
65 UVATripLevel
66
67
68
69
UVAWarningLevel
OVATripLevel
OVAWarningLevel
UPFLagTripDelay
139
UPFLagWarnLevel
140
70
OPFLagTripDelay
141
OPFLagWarnLevel
142
71
UPFLeadTripDelay
143
UPFLeadWarnLevel
144
72
OPFLeadTripDelay
73
74
75
76
77
OPFLeadWarnLevel
Screen1Param1
Screen1Param2
Screen1Param3
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
8 7 6 5
UVARGInhibitTime
4
OVARGInhibitTime
UVAInhibitTime
OVAInhibitTime
UPFLagInhibTime
UPFLagTripLevel
OPFLagInhibTime
OPFLagTripLevel
UPFLeadInhibTime
UPFLeadTripLevel
OPFLeadInhibTime
OPFLeadTripDelay
3 2 1 0
32
32
32
16
16
16
16
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
32
32
32
8
8
8
8
32
8
8
8
Size (bits) Param
8 394
395
398
399
32 396
401
402
403
406
407
404
397
400
405
408
409
425
428
429
430
1103
1103
1103
1103
1103
1103
1103
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
413
414
415
416
410
411
412
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
161
162
163
158
159
160
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
156
78
InAMod1C1TripDly
157
79
80
81
Reserved
InAMod1C0TripLvl
InAMod1C0WarnLvl
InAMod1C1TripLvl
InAMod1C1WarnLvl
InAMod1C2TripLvl
InAMod1C2WarnLvl
164
82
X
InAnMod1Ch02Type
Reserved
8 7 6 5
InAMod1C0TripDly
InAMod1C2TripDly
InAnMod1Ch01Type
4 3 2
InAnMod1Ch00Type
165
X
X X
InAMod1Ch1Format
InAMod1C1FiltFrq
InAMod1C1OpCktSt
X
166
167
83
X
X X
InAMod1C0TmpUnit
InAnMod1Ch0RTDEn
InAMod1C1TmpUnit
InAnMod1Ch1RTDEn
InAMod1C2TmpUnit
InAnMod1Ch2RTDEn
OutAnMod1FltActn
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
OutAnMod1Select
InAMod1Ch0Format
InAMod1C0FiltFrq
InAMod1C0OpCktSt
X
X X
InAMod1Ch2Format
InAMod1C2FiltFrq
InAMod1C2OpCktSt
X
X
X X
OutAnMod1IdlActn
OutAnMod1Type
Reserved
InAMod2C0TripDly
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
168
84
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
85
86
87
InAMod2C1TripDly
Reserved
InAMod2C0TripLvl
InAMod2C0WarnLvl
InAMod2C1TripLvl
InAMod2C1WarnLvl
InAMod2C2TripLvl
InAMod2C2WarnLvl
X
InAMod2C2TripDly
1
X
X
0
X
X
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
1
8
5
5
16
5
16
16
16
16
8
16
8
8
Size (bits) Param
8 443
452
461
1102
444
463
437
446
455
445
453
454
462
442
448
451
457
456
458
459
439
441
447
449
450
1101
465
438
440
16
16
8
16
16
16
16
8
8
2
8
2
4
1
2
1102
475
476
484
485
493
494
1101
474
483
492
460
466
467
464
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
239
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
176
8 7
InAnMod2Ch01Type
88
X
InAnMod2Ch02Type
Reserved
X
X X X
6 5
OutAnMod2Select
InAMod2Ch0Format
InAMod2C0FiltFrq
InAMod2C0OpCktSt
177
X
X X
InAMod2Ch1Format
InAMod2C1FiltFrq
InAMod2C1OpCktSt
X
178
179
89
X
X X
InAMod2C0TmpUnit
InAnMod2Ch0RTDEn
InAMod2C1TmpUnit
InAnMod2Ch1RTDEn
InAMod2C2TmpUnit
InAnMod2Ch2RTDEn
OutAnMod2FltActn
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
InAMod2Ch2Format
InAMod2C2FiltFrq
InAMod2C2OpCktSt
X
X X
OutAnMod2dlActn
OutAnMod2Type
Reserved
InAMod3C0TripDly
4 3 2
InAnMod2Ch00Type
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
180
90
181
185
186
187
182
183
184
91
92
93
InAMod3C1TripDly
Reserved
InAMod3C0TripLvl
InAMod3C0WarnLvl
InAMod3C1TripLvl
InAMod3C1WarnLvl
InAMod3C2TripLvl
InAMod3C2WarnLvl
X
InAMod3C2TripDly
InAnMod3Ch00Type
188
InAnMod3Ch01Type
94
X
InAnMod3Ch02Type
Reserved
189
X X
X X X
X X X
OutAnMod3Select
InAMod3Ch0Format
InAMod3C0FiltFrq
InAMod3C0OpCktSt
0
X
X
16
5
5
5
1
8
16
16
16
16
3
3
2
8
16
8
8
2
8
2
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
1
8
5
5
Size (bits) Param
5 468
477
486
1101
496
480
481
487
489
469
471
472
478
514
523
1102
506
498
495
1101
505
482
488
491
497
490
470
473
479
525
499
508
517
N/A
527
507
515
516
524
500
502
503
240
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
193
197
198
199
194
195
196
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
InAMod3Ch1Format
190
InAMod3C1FiltFrq
InAMod3C1OpCktSt
X X
X
X X
InAMod3C0TmpUnit
X X
191
95
InAnMod3Ch0RTDEn
InAMod3C1TmpUnit
InAnMod3Ch1RTDEn
InAMod3C2TmpUnit
InAnMod3Ch2RTDEn
OutAnMod3FltActn
X
X X X X
X X
192
96
InAMod4C1TripDly
97
98
99
Reserved
InAMod4C0TripLvl
InAMod4C0WarnLvl
InAMod4C1TripLvl
InAMod4C1WarnLvl
InAMod4C2TripLvl
InAMod4C2WarnLvl
200
100
X
InAnMod4Ch02Type
Reserved
8
X
X
7 6 5
X
X X
InAMod3Ch2Format
InAMod3C2FiltFrq
InAMod3C2OpCktSt
X
X
X X
OutAnMod3dlActn
OutAnMod3Type
Reserved
InAMod4C0TripDly
X
InAMod4C2TripDly
InAnMod4Ch01Type
4 3
X
X
2
X
X
InAnMod4Ch00Type
201
X
X X
InAMod4Ch1Format
InAMod4C1FiltFrq
InAMod4C1OpCktSt
X
202
203
101
X
X X
InAMod3C0TmpUnit
InAnMod4Ch0RTDEn
InAMod4C1TmpUnit
InAnMod4Ch1RTDEn
InAMod4C2TmpUnit
InAnMod4Ch2RTDEn
OutAnMod4FltActn
X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
OutAnMod4Select
InAMod4Ch0Format
InAMod4C0FiltFrq
InAMod4C0OpCktSt
X
X X
InAMod4Ch2Format
InAMod4C2FiltFrq
InAMod4C2OpCktSt
X
X X
X
OutAnMod4dlActn
OutAnMod4Type
Reserved
X
X
X
X
X
1
X
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
X
5
5
16
5
16
16
16
16
8
16
8
8
2
8
2
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
3
3
2
Size (bits) Param
3 509
511
512
518
520
513
519
522
528
521
501
504
510
556
530
539
548
538
546
547
555
545
554
1102
537
529
526
1101
536
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
4
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
1
8
541
544
550
553
552
532
535
559
560
557
1001
534
540
542
543
549
551
1101
558
531
533
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
241
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly Revision 1
shows Attribute 3 Format and Attribute 2 Member List for revision 1 of the assembly. This is a stripped down simple version of a config assembly.
Table 69 - Instance 120 — Configuration Assembly
2
3
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0
1
0
ConfigAssyRev = 1
Reserved
1 FLASetting
8 7 6
Reserved
5 4 3
4
5
3
X X
OLWarningLevel
X X X X
X
X
TripClass
OLPTCResetMode
SingleOrThreePh
Reserved
OLResetLevel
2 1 0
32
1
6
8
1
8
8
Size (bits) Param
16
16
1002
N/A
171
172
173
176
N/A
174
175
Instance 144 – Default Consumed Assembly
2
3
Table 70 - Instance 144 – Default Consumed Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0 OutputStatus0
NetworkStart1 (O.LogicDefinedPt00Data)
NetworkStart2 (O.LogicDefinedPt01Data)
1
0
TripReset
EmergencyStart
RemoteTrip
Reserved
8
X
7 6 5 4
X
3
X
2
X
X
X
X
X
X X
HMILED1Green
HMILED2Green
X
HMILED3Green
HMILED3Red
HMILED4Red
Reserved
1
X X
DLXPtDeviceIn
DLXAnDeviceIn
X
1
X
0
X
16
16
Size (bits) Path
16 Param18
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
N/A
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
N/A
Symbolic
Symbolic
Instance 198 - Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Table 71 - Instance 198 – Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
3
4
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0
1
0 Reserved for Logix
2
1
DeviceStaus0
5
2
DeviceStaus1
InputStatus0
InputStatus1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16
16
16
16
Size (bits) Param
32 1104
20
21
16
17
242
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
50
51
48
49
52
53
46
47
44
45
38
39
36
37
40
41
42
43
34
35
32
33
30
31
28
29
26
27
24
25
21
22
23
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
6
3
OutputStatus
4
OpStationStatus
TripStsCurrent
5
WarnStsCurrent
TripStsVoltage
6
WarnStsVoltage
TripStsPower
7
WarnStsPower
TripStsControl
8
WarnStsControl
TripStsAnalog
19
9
WarnStsAnalog
Reserved
MismatchStatus
20
10 CurrentImbal
AvgPercentFLA
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
AverageCurrent
L1Current
L2Current
L3Current
GFCurrent
Reserved
Datalink1
Datalink2
Datalink3
Datalink4
Datalink5
Datalink6
Datalink7
Datalink8
PtDeviceOuts
AnDeviceOuts
InAnMod1Ch00
InAnMod1Ch01
InAnMod1Ch02
Reserved
8 7 6 5
ThermUtilizedPct
4 3 2 1 0
32
32
32
16
16
16
16
16
16
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
16
16
32
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
16
16
8
16
16
16
16
Size (bits) Param
16 18
19
4
10
5
40
1
52
50
13
8
14
1103
12
7
11
6
32 46
43
44
45
51
1103
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
348
1105
111
112
113
1103
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
243
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
63
64
61
62
59
60
57
58
55
56
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
54
27
InAnMod2Ch00
28
InAnMod2Ch01
InAnMod2Ch02
29
Reserved
InAnMod3Ch00
30
InAnMod3Ch01
InAnMod3Ch02
31
Reserved
InAnMod4Ch00
65
32
InAnMod4Ch01
InAnMod4Ch02
Reserved
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
Size (bits) Param
16 114
115
116
1103
117
118
119
1103
120
121
122
1103
Instance 199 - All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
25
26
27
28
29
23
24
21
22
Table 72 - Instance 199 - All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
16
17
14
15
18
19
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0
1
0 Reserved for Logix
1
2
DeviceStaus0
DeviceStaus1
InputStatus0
InputStatus1
3
4
5
6
OutputStatus
OpStationStatus
TripStsCurrent
WarnStsCurrent
TripStsVoltage
WarnStsVoltage
TripStsPower
WarnStsPower
7
8
9
TripStsControl
WarnStsControl
TripStsAnalog
WarnStsAnalog
Reserved
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
20
10 CurrentImbalance
AvgPercentFLA
ThermUtilizedPct
11 AverageCurrent
12 L1Current
13 L2Current
14 L3Current
0 Size (bits) Param
32
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
32
1104
8
14
7
13
6
12
5
11
1
52
1104
40
50
4
10
18
19
16
17
20
21
46
32
32
32
43
44
45
244
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
75
76
77
72
73
74
69
70
71
66
67
68
63
64
61
62
59
60
57
58
55
56
53
54
51
52
49
50
47
48
45
46
43
44
41
42
39
40
37
38
35
36
33
34
31
32
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
30
15
GFCurrent
16
Reserved
AvgVoltageLtoL
17
L1toL2Voltage
L2toL3Voltage
L3toL1Voltage
18 TotalRealPower
19 TotalReactivePwr
20 TotalApparentPwr
21 TotalPowerFactor
22 Datalink0
23 Datalink1
24 Datalink2
25 Datalink3
26 Datalink4
27 Datalink5
28 Datalink6
29 Datalink7
30
PtDeviceOuts
31
AnDeviceOuts
InAnMod1Ch00
65
32
InAnMod1Ch01
InAnMod1Ch02
Reserved
33
34
InAnMod2Ch00
InAnMod2Ch01
InAnMod2Ch02
35
Reserved
InAnMod3Ch00
InAnMod3Ch01
36
37
38
InAnMod3Ch02
Reserved
InAnMod4Ch00
InAnMod4Ch01
InAnMod4Ch02
Reserved
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
32
32
32
32
32
32
16
16
16
16
16
Size (bits) Param
16 51
1103
56
53
54
55
32 67
71
75
79
1291
1292
1293
32
32
32
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
32
32
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1103
120
121
122
1103
1103
117
118
119
114
115
116
348
1105
111
112
113
1103
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
245
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005
No class attributes are supported for the Connection Object
Multiple instances of the Connection Object are supported, instances 1, 2 and 4 from the group 2 predefined master/slave connection set, and instances 5-7 are available explicit UCMM connections.
Instance 1 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Explicit Message Connection.
The instance 1 attributes in
Table 73 - Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 Instance 1 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
State
Instance Type
Transport Class Trigger
Produced Connection ID
Consumed Connection ID
Initial Comm Characteristics
Produced Connection Size
Consumed Connection Size
Expected Packet Rate
Watchdog Action
Produced Connection Path Length UINT
Produced Connection Path
Consumed Connection Path Length UINT
Consumed Connection Path
Data Type Value
USINT
USINT
0=nonexistant
1=configuring
3=established
4=timed out
0=Explicit
Message
USINT
UINT
UINT
0x83 - Server, Transport Class 3
10xxxxxx011 xxxxxx = node address
10xxxxxx100 xxxxxx = node address
0x22 USINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
USINT
0x61
0x61 in milliseconds
01 = auto delete
03 = deferred delete
0
Empty
0
Empty
246
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
Instance 2 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Polled IO Message Connection.
The instance 2 attributes in
5
6
7
8
9
15
16
13
14
Table 74 - Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 Instance 2 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data
Type
Value
1
2
3
4
12
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get
Get/Set
Get
Get/Set
State
Instance Type
Transport Class Trigger
Produced Connection ID
Consumed Connection ID
Initial Comm Characteristics
Produced Connection Size
Consumed Connection Size
Expected Packet Rate
Watchdog Action
USINT
USINT
USINT
UINT
UINT
USINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
USINT
Produced Connection Path Length UINT
Produced Connection Path
Consumed Connection Path Length UINT
Consumed Connection Path
0=nonexistant
1=configuring
3=established
4=timed out
1= I/O Connection
0x82 - Server, Transport Class 2
(If alloc_choice != polled and ack suppression is enabled then value = 0x80)
01111xxxxxx xxxxxx= node address
10xxxxxx101 xxxxxx= node address
0x21
0 to 8
0 to 8 in milliseconds
0=transition to timed out
1=auto delete
2=auto reset
8
21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03
8
21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
247
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Instance 4 is the Predefined Group 2 Connection Set Change of State / Cyclic I/O
Message Connection. The instance 4 attributes in
are supported:
Table 75 - Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 Instance 4 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
12
15
16
13
14
7
8
9
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get/Set
State
Instance Type
Transport Class Trigger
Produced Connection ID
Consumed Connection ID
Initial Comm Characteristics
Produced Connection Size
Consumed Connection Size
Expected Packet Rate
Watchdog Action
Produced Connection Path Length UINT
Produced Connection Path
Consumed Connection Path Length UINT
Consumed Connection Path
Data Type Value
USINT
USINT
0=nonexistant
1=configuring
3=established
4=timed out
1=I/O Connection
USINT
0x00 (Cyclic, unacknowledged)
0x03 (Cyclic, acknowledged)
0x10 (COS, unacknowledged)
0x13 (COS, acknowledged)
UINT
UINT
USINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
USINT
01101xxxxxx xxxxxx= node address
10xxxxxx101 xxxxxx= node address
0x02 (acknowledged)
0x0F (unacknowledged)
0 to 8
0 to 8 in milliseconds
0=transition to timed out
1=auto delete
2=auto reset
8
21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03
8
21 04 00 25 (assy inst) 00 30 03
248
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
Instances 5 - 7 are available group 3 explicit message connections that are allocated through the UCMM. The attributes in
are supported:
Table 76 - Connection Object — CLASS CODE 0x0005 Instance 5…7 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
6
7
12
13
14
15
16
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
State
Instance Type
Transport Class Trigger
Produced Connection ID
Consumed Connection ID
Initial Comm Characteristics
Produced Connection Size
Consumed Connection Size
Expected Packet Rate
Watchdog Action
Produced Connection Path Length UINT
Produced Connection Path
Consumed Connection Path
Length
Consumed Connection Path
UINT
Data Type Value
USINT
0=nonexistant
1=configuring
3=established
4=timed out
USINT
USINT
0=Explicit
Message
0x83 - Server, Transport Class 3
UINT
UINT
USINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
USINT
Depends on message group and
Message ID
Depends on message group and
Message ID
0x33 (Group 3)
0 in milliseconds
01 = auto delete
03 = deferred delete
0
Empty
0
Empty
are implemented for the Connection Object.
Table 77 - Connection Object Services
Service Code
0x05
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
No
No
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Reset
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Discrete Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0008
The class attributes in Table 78
are supported for the Discrete Input Point Object:
Table 78 - Discrete Input Point Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
Name
Revision
Max. Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
2
22
22 instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported.
Table 79 - Discrete Input Point Object Instances
Instance
1
2
Name
InputPt00
InputPt01
Description
Control Module Input 0
Control Module Input 1
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
249
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
21
22
19
20
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
InputPt02
InputPt03
InputPt04
InputPt05
InputDigMod1Pt00
InputDigMod1Pt01
InputDigMod1Pt02
InputDigMod1Pt03
InputDigMod2Pt00
InputDigMod2Pt01
InputDigMod2Pt02
InputDigMod2Pt03
InputDigMod3Pt00
InputDigMod3Pt01
InputDigMod3Pt02
InputDigMod3Pt03
InputDigMod4Pt00
InputDigMod4Pt01
InputDigMod4Pt02
InputDigMod4Pt03
Control Module Input 2
Control Module Input 3
Control Module Input 4
Control Module Input 5
Digital Expansion Module 1 Input 0
Digital Expansion Module 1 Input 1
Digital Expansion Module 1 Input 2
Digital Expansion Module 1 Input 3
Digital Expansion Module 2 Input 0
Digital Expansion Module 2 Input 1
Digital Expansion Module 2 Input 2
Digital Expansion Module 2 Input 3
Digital Expansion Module 3 Input 0
Digital Expansion Module 3 Input 1
Digital Expansion Module 3 Input 2
Digital Expansion Module 3 Input 3
Digital Expansion Module 4 Input 0
Digital Expansion Module 4 Input 1
Digital Expansion Module 4 Input 2
Digital Expansion Module 4 Input 3
All instances contain the attributes in
.
Table 80 - Discrete Input Point Object Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
3
115
116
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Value
Force Enable
Force Value
Data Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Value
0=OFF, 1=ON
0=Disable, 1=Enable
0=OFF, 1=ON
The common services in
Table 81 are implemented for the Discrete Input Point
Object.
Table 81 - Discrete Input Point Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
Yes
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Discrete Output Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x0009
The class attributes in Table 82
are supported for the Discrete Output Point Object:
Table 82 - Discrete Output Point Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
Name
Revision
Max. Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
1
11
11 instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported.
250
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
Table 83 - Discrete Output Point Object Instances
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Instance
1
Name
OutputPt00
OutputPt01
OutputPt02
OutDigMod1Pt00
OutDigMod1Pt01
OutDigMod2Pt00
OutDigMod2Pt01
OutDigMod3Pt00
OutDigMod3Pt01
OutDigMod4Pt00
OutDigMod4Pt01
Description
Control Module Output 0
Control Module Output 1
Control Module Output 2
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output 0
Digital Expansion Module 1 Output 1
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output 0
Digital Expansion Module 2 Output 1
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output 0
Digital Expansion Module 3 Output 1
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output 0
Digital Expansion Module 4 Output 1
All instances contains the attributes in Table 84
.
Table 84 - Discrete Output Point Object Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
3 Get/Set Value
5
6
7
8
113
114
115
116
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Fault Action
Fault Value
Idle Action
Idle Value
Pr Fault Action
Pr Fault Value
Force Enable
Force Value
Data Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
117 Get/Set Input Binding
STRUCT:
USINT
Array of USINT
Value
0=OFF, 1=ON
0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last
State
0=OFF, 1=ON
0=Fault Value attribute, 1=Hold Last
State
0=OFF, 1=ON
0=Pr Fault Value attribute, 1=Ignore
0=OFF, 1=ON
0=Disable, 1=Enable
0=OFF, 1=ON
Size of appendix I encoded path
Appendix I encoded path: NULL path means attribute 3 drives the output.
Otherwise, this is a path to a bit in an instance of the DeviceLogix Data Table.
The common services in
Table 85 are implemented for the Discrete Output Point
Object.
Table 85 - Discrete Output Point Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
No
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Analog Input Point Object — CLASS CODE 0x000A
The class attributes in Table 86
are supported for the Analog Input Point Object:
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
251
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Table 86 - Analog Input Point Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
Name
Revision
Max. Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
2
1
12 Instances of the Analog Input Point Object are supported. The raw analog value is scaled appropriately to the analog input configuration parameters and the scaled value are placed in the Value attribute.
Table 87 - Analog Input Point Object Instances
9
10
7
8
11
12
5
6
3
4
Instance
1
2
Name
InAnMod1Ch00
InAnMod1Ch01
InAnMod1Ch02
InAnMod2Ch00
InAnMod2Ch01
InAnMod2Ch02
InAnMod3Ch00
InAnMod3Ch01
InAnMod3Ch02
InAnMod4Ch00
InAnMod4Ch01
InAnMod4Ch02
Description
Analog Expansion Module 1 Input Channel 0
Analog Expansion Module 1 Input Channel 1
Analog Expansion Module 1 Input Channel 2
Analog Expansion Module 2 Input Channel 0
Analog Expansion Module 2 Input Channel 1
Analog Expansion Module 2 Input Channel 2
Analog Expansion Module 3 Input Channel 0
Analog Expansion Module 3 Input Channel 1
Analog Expansion Module 3 Input Channel 2
Analog Expansion Module 4 Input Channel 0
Analog Expansion Module 4 Input Channel 1
Analog Expansion Module 4 Input Channel 2
All instances contains the attributes in Table 88
.
Table 88 - Analog Input Point Object Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
3 Get Value
8
148
149
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Value Data Type
Force Enable
Force Value
Data Type
INT
USINT
BOOL
INT
Value
Default = 0
0=INT
0=Disable, 1=Enable
Default = 0
The common services in
Table 89 are implemented for the Analog Input Point Object.
Table 89 - Analog Input Point Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
Yes
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Parameter Object — CLASS CODE 0x000F
The class attributes in Table 90
are supported for the Parameter Object:
Table 90 - Parameter Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule
1
2
Get
Get
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
1
560
252
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
9
10
Attribute ID Access Rule
8 Get
Get
Get
Name
Parameter Class Descriptor
Data Type
WORD
Configuration Assembly Instance UINT
Native Language UINT
Value
0x03
0
1 = English
The instance attributes in
are implemented for all parameter attributes.
Table 91 - Parameter Object Instance Attributes
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
19
20
21
3
9
10
7
8
4
5
6
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1
2
Get/Set
Get
Value
Link Path Size
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Data Type
Specified in Descriptor
USINT
Value
08
Link Path
Descriptor
Data Type
Data Size
Array of:
BYTE
EPATH
WORD
EPATH
USINT
Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING
Units String
Help String
Minimum Value
SHORT_STRING
Path to specified object attribute.
Parameter Dependent
Parameter Dependent
Parameter Dependent
Parameter Dependent
Parameter Dependent
SHORT_STRING Parameter Dependent
Specified in Descriptor Parameter Dependent
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Maximum Value
Default Value
Scaling Multiplier
Scaling Divisor
Scaling Base
Scaling Offset
Multiplier Link
Divisor Link
Base Link
Offset Link
Decimal Precision
Specified in Descriptor Parameter Dependent
Specified in Descriptor Parameter Dependent
UINT
UINT
UINT
INT
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
USINT
01
01
01
00
0
0
0
0
Parameter Dependent
are implemented for the Parameter Object.
Table 92 - Parameter Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
Yes
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Parameter Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x0010
The class attributes in Table 93
are supported for the Parameter Object:
Table 93 - Parameter Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule
1
2
8
Get
Get
Get
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Native Language
Data Type
UINT
UINT
USINT
Value
1
23
1 = English
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
253
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
The instance attributes in Table 94 are supported for all parameter group instances and
are implemented for all parameter attributes.
Table 94 - Parameter Group Object Instance Attributes
4 n
2
3
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1 Get Group Name String
Data Type
SHORT_STRING
Get
Get
Get
Get
Number of Members UINT
1 st
Parameter
2 nd
Parameter
Nth Parameter
UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
The common services in
Table 95 are implemented for the Parameter Group Object.
Table 95 - Parameter Group Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
Implemented for:
Class
Yes
Instance
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Discrete Output Group Object — CLASS CODE 0x001E
No class attributes are supported for the Discrete Output Group Object.
Five instances of the Discrete Output Group Object are supported.
lists the attributes for Instance 1:
Table 96 - Discrete Output Group Object Instance 1 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
3
4
6
Get
Get
Get/Set
Number of Instances
Binding
Command
Data Type
USINT
Array of UINT
BOOL
104 Get/Set
Network Status
Override
BOOL
105 Get/Set Comm Status Override BOOL
Value
11
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11
0=idle; 1=run
0=No Override (go to safe state)
1=Override (run local logic)
0=No override (go to safe state)
1=Override (run local logic)
Instances 2-5 each represent a single expansion module. They have the attributes listed in
Table 97 - Discrete Output Group Object Instance 2…5 Attributes
7
8
9
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
3
4
6
Get
Get
Get/Set
Number of Instances
Binding
Command
Data Type
USINT
Array of UINT
BOOL
Value
2
Instance 2: 4, 5
Instance 3: 6, 7
Instance 4: 8, 9
Instance 5: 10, 11
0=idle; 1=run
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Fault Action
Fault Value
Idle Action
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
0=Fault Value Attribute, 1=Hold Last State
0=OFF, 1=ON
0=Idle Value Attribute, 1=Hold Last State
254
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
10
113
114
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Idle Value
Pr Fault Action
Pr Fault Value
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
0=OFF, 1=ON
0=Pr Fault Value Attribute, 1=Ignore
0=OFF, 1=ON
The common services in
Table 98 are implemented for the Discrete Output Group
Object.
Table 98 - Discrete Output Group Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
No
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Control Supervisor Object — CLASS CODE 0x0029
No class attributes are supported.
A single instance (instance 1) of the Control Supervisor Object is supported.
Table 99 - Control Supervisor Object Instance 1 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type
10 Get Tripped BOOL
11
12
Get
Get/Set
Warning
Fault Reset
BOOL
BOOL
Value
0 = No Fault present
1 = Fault Latched
0 = No Warning present
1 = Warning present (not latched)
0->1 = Trip Reset otherwise no action
The common services in
Table 100 are implemented for the Control Supervisor
Object.
Table 100 - Control Supervisor Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
No
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Overload Object — CLASS CODE 0x002c
No class attributes are supported for the Overload Object.
A single instance (instance 1) of the Overload Object is supported.
Table 101 - Overload Object Instance 1 Attributes
6
7
8
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
4
5
Get/Set
Get
Trip Class
Average Current
Get
Get
Get
%Phase Imbal
% Thermal Utilized
Current L1
Data Type
USINT
INT
USINT
USINT
INT
Value
5…30 xxx.x Amps (tenths of amps) xxx% FLA xxx% FLA xxx.x Amps (tenths of amps)
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
255
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
10
11
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
9 Get Current L2
Get
Get
Current L3
GF Current
Data Type
INT
INT
INT
Value
xxx.x Amps (tenths of amps) xxx.x Amps (tenths of amps)
0.00 – 12.75 Amps
The common services in
Table 102 are implemented for the Overload Object.
Table 102 - Overload Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
No
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Base Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004E
The class attributes in Table 103
are supported for the Base Energy Object.
Table 103 - Base Energy Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule
1 Get
Name
Object Revision
Data Type
USINT
Value
2
A single instance of the Base Energy Object is supported
Table 104 - Base Energy Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1
2
Get
Get
Data Type
Energy/Resource Type UINT
Energy Object
Capabilities
WORD
3
4
5
7
9
10
12
16
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Set
Value
1 = Electrical
0x0001 = Energy Measured
Energy Accuracy UINT
Energy Accuracy Basis UINT
Full Scale Power
Reading
Real
Odometer Reset Enable BOOL
500 = 5.00 percent of full scale reading
1 = Percent of full scale reading x.xxx kW
Consumed Energy
Odometer
Energy Type Specific
Object Path
ODOMETER
STRUCT of UINT
Padded EPATH
Returns params 80-84 values.
Total Energy Odometer SIGNED ODOMETER Returns params 80-84 values.
Total Real Power REAL Param 67 value converted to a REAL
03 00 21 00 4F 00 24 01
0 = Disabled (Default)
1 = Enabled
Enables resetting of Energy
Odometers by Reset service
are implemented for the Base Energy Object.
256
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
Table 105 - Base Energy Object Common Services
Service Code
0x01
0x05
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
No
No
No
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Service Name
GetAttributes_All
Reset
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
describes the Get_Attributes_All response.
Table 106 - Base Energy Object Class Attributes Get_Attributes_All Response
9
10
11
12
6
7
4
5
8
2
3
Attribute ID
1
13
14
Data Type
UINT
WORD
UINT
UINT
REAL
UINT
ODOMETER
ODOMETER
SIGNED
ODOMETER
REAL
REAL
STRUCT of UINT,
Padded EPATH
UINT
Array of STRUCT of UINT, Padded
EPATH
1
Name
Energy/Resource Type
Energy Object Capabilities
Energy Accuracy
Energy Accuracy Basis
Full Scale Reading
Data Status
Consumed Energy Odometer
Generated Energy Odometer
Value
Attribute 1 value
Attribute 2 value
Attribute 3 value
Attribute 4 value
Attribute 5 value
0
0Attribute 7 value
0,0,0,0,0
Total Energy Odometer Attribute 9 value
Energy Transfer Rate Attribute 10 value
Energy Transfer Rate User Setting 0.0
Energy Type Specific Object Path Attribute 12 value
Energy Aggregation Path Array
Size
0
Energy Aggregation Paths Null
15
16
17
STRINGI
BOOL
BOOL
Energy Identifier
Odometer Reset Enable
Metering State
LanguageChar1 USINT =‘e’
LanguageChar2 USINT)=‘n’
LanguageChar3 USINT) =‘g’
CharStringStruct USINT=0xD0
CharSet UINT = 0 = undefined
InternationalString = null
Attribute 16 value
1
Electrical Energy Object — CLASS CODE 0x004F
No class attributes are supported for the Electrical Energy Object.
A single instance of the Electrical Energy Object is supported
Table 107 - Electrical Energy Object Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1 Get
Real Energy Consumed
Odometer
3
4
Get
Get
Real Energy Net
Odometer
Reactive Energy
Consumed Odometer
Data Type
ODOMETER
SIGNED
ODOMEETER
ODOMETER
Value
Returns params 80-84 values.
Returns params 80-84 values.
Returns params 85-89 values.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
257
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
258
39
40
41
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
36
37
38
34
35
32
33
30
31
28
29
26
27
24
25
21
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
12
13
10
11
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
5 Get
Reactive Energy
Generated Odometer
6
7
9
Get
Get
Get
Reactive Energy Net
Odometer
Apparent Energy
Odometer
Line Frequency
14
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
L1 Current
L2 Current
L3 Current
Average Current
Percent Current
Unbalance
23
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
L1 to N Voltage
L2 to N Voltage
L3 to N Voltage
Avg Voltage L to N
L1 to L2 Voltage
L2 to L3 Voltage
L3 to L1 Voltage
Avg Voltage Lto N
Percent Voltage
Unbalance
Get
Get
Get
Data Type
ODOMETER
ODOMETER
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
L1 Real Power
L2 Real Power
L3 Real Power
Total Real Power
L1 Reactive Power
L2 Reactive Power
REAL
REAL
L3 Reactive Power REAL
Total Reactive Power REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
L1 Apparent Power
L2 Apparent Power
REAL
REAL
L3 Apparent Power REAL
Total Apparent Power REAL
L1 True Power Factor REAL
L2 True Power Factor REAL
L3 True Power Factor REAL
Three Phase True Power
Factor
Phase Rotation
Associated Energy
Object Path
REAL
UINT
STRUCT of UINT
Padded EPATH
Value
Returns params 90-94 values.
SIGNED ODOMETER Returns params 95-99 values.
Returns params 100-104 values.
Param 62 value converted to a REAL
Param 43 value converted to a REAL
Param 44 value converted to a REAL
Param 45 value converted to a REAL
Param 46 value converted to a REAL
Param 52 value converted to a REAL
Param 57 value converted to a REAL
Param 58 value converted to a REAL
Param 59 value converted to a REAL
Param 60 value converted to a REAL
Param 53 value converted to a REAL
Param 54 value converted to a REAL
Param 55 value converted to a REAL
Param 56 value converted to a REAL
Param 61 value converted to a REAL
Param 64 value converted to a REAL
Param 65 value converted to a REAL
Param 66 value converted to a REAL
Param 67 value converted to a REAL
Param 68 value converted to a REAL
Param 68 value converted to a REAL
Param 70 value converted to a REAL
Param 71 value converted to a REAL
Param 72 value converted to a REAL
Param 73 value converted to a REAL
Param 74 value converted to a REAL
Param 75 value converted to a REAL
Param 76 value converted to a REAL
Param 77 value converted to a REAL
Param 78 value converted to a REAL
Param 79 value converted to a REAL
Param 63 value
03 00 21 00 4E 00 24 01
are implemented for the Electrical Energy Object.
Table 108 - Electrical Energy Object Common Services
Service Code
0x01
0x0E
Implemented for:
Class
No
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Service Name
GetAttributes_All
Get_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
describes the Get_Attributes_All response.
Table 109 - Electrical Energy Object Class Attributes Get_Attributes_All Response
5
32
33
30
31
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
28
29
26
27
24
25
22
23
20
21
18
19
16
17
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
2
3
Attribute ID
1
4
41
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
UINT
STRUCT of UINT
Padded EPATH
Data Type Name Value
Array[5] of INT Real Energy Consumed Odometer Attribute 1 Value
Array[5] of INT Real Energy Generated Odometer 0.0.0.0.0
Array[5] of INT Real Energy Net Odometer Attribute 3 Value
Array[5] of INT
Array[5] of INT
Reactive Energy Consumed
Odometer
Reactive Energy Generated
Odometer
Attribute 4 Value
Attribute 5 Value
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
Array[5] of INT Reactive Energy Net Odometer Attribute 6 Value
Array[5] of INT Apparent Energy Odometer Attribute 7 Value
Array[5] of INT
REAL Line Frequency
0.0.0.0.0
Attribute 9 Value
L1 Current
L2 Current
L3 Current
Average Current
Attribute 10 Value
Attribute 11 Value
Attribute 12 Value
Attribute 13 Value
Percent Current Unbalance
L1 to N Voltage
L2 to N Voltage
L3 to N Voltage
Avg Voltage L to N
L1 to L2 Voltage
L2 to L3 Voltage
L3 to L1 Voltage
Avg Voltage Lto N
Percent Voltage Unbalance
L1 Real Power
L2 Real Power
L3 Real Power
Total Real Power
L1 Reactive Power
L2 Reactive Power
Associated Energy Object Path Attribute 41 Value
Attribute 14 Value
Attribute 15 Value
Attribute 16 Value
Attribute 17 Value
Attribute 18 Value
Attribute 19 Value
Attribute 20 Value
Attribute 21 Value
Attribute 22 Value
Attribute 23 Value
Attribute 24 Value
Attribute 25 Value
Attribute 26 Value
Attribute 27 Value
Attribute 28 Value
Attribute 29 Value
L3 Reactive Power
Total Reactive Power
L1 Apparent Power
L2 Apparent Power
L3 Apparent Power
Total Apparent Power
L1 True Power Factor
L2 True Power Factor
Attribute 30 Value
Attribute 31 Value
Attribute 32 Value
Attribute 33 Value
Attribute 34 Value
Attribute 35 Value
Attribute 36 Value
Attribute 37 Value
L3 True Power Factor Attribute 38 Value
Three Phase True Power Factor Attribute 39 Value
Phase Rotation Attribute 40 Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
259
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Wall Clock Time Object — CLASS CODE 0x008B
The class attributes in Table 110
are supported:
Table 110 - Wall Clock Time Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule
1
2
Get
Get
Name
Object Revision
Number of Instances
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
3
1
One instance is supported:
Table 111 - Wall Clock Time Object Instance Attributes
Attribute
ID
Access Rule Name
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Data Type Value
Set
Set / SSV
Set
Set / SSV
Set / SSV
Set / SSV
Set / SSV
Time Zone
Offset from CSV
Local Time
Adjustment
Date and Time
(Local Time)
Current UT value
(UTC Time)
UTC Date and Time
(UTC Time)
UINT
LINT
WORD
DINT[7] –
Array of seven DINTs
LINT
DINT[7] –
Array of seven DINTs
Time Zone String Struct of UDINT
Time zone in which Current value is being used
(Never been used)
64-bit offset value in µS that when added to the CST value yields the Current_UTC_Value
Set of flags for specific local time adjustments
(Never been used)
Current adjusted time in human readable format.
DINT[0] – year
DINT[1] – month
DINT[2] – day
DINT[3] – hour
DINT[4] – minute
DINT[5] – second
DINT[6] –
sec.
Current value of Wall Clock Time.
64-bit µs value referenced from 0000 hrs January 1, 1970
Current time in human readable format.
DINT[0] – year
DINT[1] – month
DINT[2] – day
DINT[3] – hour
DINT[4] – minute
DINT[5] – second
DINT[6] –
sec.
This string specifies the time zone where the controller is located, and ultimately the adjustment in hours and minutes applied to the UTC value to generate the local time value.
TimeZoneString can be specified in the following formats: o UTC+hh:mm <location> o UTC-hh:mm <location> hh:mm portion is used internally to calculate the local time, and the <location> portion is used to describe the time zone and is optional.
GMT is also accepted
Length of the Data array can be from 10 to 82.
Examples:
UTC-05:00 Eastern Time
UTC+01:00 Coordinated Universal Time
260
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
Attribute
ID
Access Rule Name
9
Data Type
Set / SSV DST Adjustment INT
10 USINT
11
Set / SSV Enable DST
Set
Current value
(local time)
LINT
Value
The number of minutes to be adjusted for daylight saving time
It specifies if we are in daylight saving time or not. Not internally set. Needs user action.
Adjusted Local value of Wall Clock Time.
64-bit µS value referenced from 0000 hrs
January 1, 1970
are implemented for the Wall Clock Time Object.
Table 112 - Wall Clock Time Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
Yes
Yes
Instance
Yes
No
Service Name
GetAttributes_All
Set_Attribute_Single
DPI Fault Object — CLASS CODE 0x0097
This object provides access to fault information within the device.
The class attributes in Table 113
are supported:
Table 113 - DPI Fault Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Class Revision
Number of Instances
Fault Cmd Write
Fault Instance Read
Fault Data list
Data Type Value
UINT 1
UINT
USINT
UINT
8
0=NOP; 1=Clear Fault; 2=Clear Flt
Queue
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing information about the
Fault that tripped the Device
Struct of:
Number of Parameter Instances UINT
Parameter Instances
Number of Recorded Faults
UINT [x ]
UINT
The total number of parameters instances stored when a fault occurs
An array of parameters instance numbers
The number of Faults recorded in the
Fault Queue
Five instances of the DPI Fault Object are supported.
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
261
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
262
Table 114 - DPI Fault Object Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
Full / All Info
Fault Code
Fault Source
0 Get
Data Type
Struct of:
UINT
Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT
Device Object
Instance
Fault Text
USINT
BYTE[16]
Fault Time Stamp Struct of:
1
3
Get
Get
Timer Value ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
Help Object
Instance
Fault Data
UINT
Basic Info
Fault Code
Struct of:
UINT
Fault Source Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT
Device Object
Instance
USINT
Fault Time Stamp Struct of:
Timer Value ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
Help Text STRING
Value
See
0
0x2c
See
See
0
0x2C
See
The common services in
Table 115 are implemented for the DPI Fault Object.
Table 115 - DPI Fault Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
Yes
Yes
Instance
Yes
No
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings.
Table 116 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings
10
11
12
8
9
5
6
7
2
3
4
Fault Code Fault Text
0 No Fault
1 OverloadTrip
PhaseLossTrip
GroundFaultTrip
StallTrip
JamTrip
UnderloadTrip
Current Imbal
L1UnderCurrTrip
L2UnderCurrTrip
L3UnderCurrTrip
L1OverCurrenTrip
L2OverCurrenTrip
Help Text
No Fault Conditions Detected
Motor current overload condition
Phase current Loss detected in one of the motor phases
Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
Motor has not reached full speed by the end of Stall Enable Time
Motor current has exceed the programmed jam trip level
Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
Phase to phase current imbalance detected
L1Current was below L1 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L2Current was below L2 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L3Current was below L3 Undercurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
57
58
55
56
52
53
54
61
62
59
60
46
47
48
49
50
51
44
45
42
43
40
41
38
39
36
37
34
35
32
33
30
31
28
29
26
27
24
25
22
23
20
21
18
19
16
17
14
15
Fault Code Fault Text
13 L3OverCurrenTrip
L1LineLossTrip
L2LineLossTrip
L3LineLossTrip
UnderVoltageTrip
OverVoltageTrip
VoltageUnbalTrip
PhaseRotationTrp
UnderFreqTrip
OverFreqTrip
Fault23
Fault24
Fault25
Fault26
Fault27
Fault28
Fault29
Fault30
Fault31
Fault32
UnderKWTrip
OverKWTrip
UnderKVARConTrip
OverKVARConTrip
UnderKVARGenTrip
OverKVARGenTrip
UnderKVATrip
OverKVATrip
UnderPFLagTrip
OverPFLagTrip
UnderPFLeadTrip
OverPFLeadTrip
Fault45
Fault46
Fault47
Fault48
TestTrip
PTCTrip
DLXTrip
OperStationTrip
RemoteTrip
BlockedStartTrip
Trip55
ConfigTrip
Trip57
DLXFBTimeoutTrip
Trip59
Trip60
Trip61
NVSTrip
Help Text
L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Level longer than Trip Delay
L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
Line voltage frequency is below trip level
Line voltage frequency has exceeded trip level
Total Real Power(kW)is below trip level
Total Real Power(kW)has exceeded trip level
Under Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Over Total Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Under Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Over Total Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) is below trip level
Total Apparent Power (VA or kVA or MVA) exceeded trip level
Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Test trip caused by holding the Test/Rest button for 2 seconds
PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
DeviceLogix defined trip was generated
The Stop button the Operator Station was pressed
Remote trip command detected
Maximum starts per hour exceeded
Hardware configuration fault. Check for shorts on input terminal
Invalid parameter config. See parameters 38-39 for details
DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
NonVolatile Storage memory problem detected
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
263
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
90
91
88
89
92
86
87
84
85
82
83
80
81
78
79
76
77
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
74
75
72
73
70
71
68
69
66
67
64
65
Fault Code Fault Text
63 Trip63
Trip64
InAnMod1Ch00Trip
InAnMod1Ch01Trip
InAnMod1Ch02Trip
InAnMod2Ch00Trip
InAnMod2Ch01Trip
InAnMod2Ch02Trip
InAnMod3Ch00Trip
InAnMod3Ch01Trip
InAnMod3Ch02Trip
InAnMod4Ch00Trip
InAnMod4Ch01Trip
OperStatMismatch
DigModMismatch
AnModMismatch
Trip96
Trip97
HardwareFltTrip
Trip99
InAnMod4Ch02Trip
Trip77
Trip78
Trip79
Trip80
DigitalMod1Trip
DigitalMod2Trip
DigitalMod3Trip
DigitalMod4Trip
AnalogMod1Trip
AnalogMod2Trip
AnalogMod3Trip
AnalogMod4Trip
Trip89
CtlModMismatch
SenseModMismatch
CommModMismatch
Help Text
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Trip Level
Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Control Module installed does not match the expected type
Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
Operator Station installed does not match expected type
Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
A hardware fault condition was detected
DPI Warning Object — CLASS CODE 0x0098
This object provides access to warning information within the device.
The class attributes in Table 117
are supported:
Table 117 - DPI Warning Object Class Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
1 Get Class Revision
2 Get Number of Instances
Data Type Value
UINT 1
UINT 8
264
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
Attribute ID Access Rule
3
4
6
Get/Set
Get
Get
Name
Warning Cmd Write
Warning Instance Read
Data Type Value
USINT 0=NOP 2=Clear Queue
UINT
Number of Recorded Faults UINT
The instance of the Warning Queue
Entry containing information about the most recent warning
The number of Warning recorded in the Warning Queue
Four instances of the DPI Warning Object are supported.
Table 118 - DPI Warning Object Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
Full / All Info
Warning Code
Warning Source
0 Get
Data Type
Struct of:
UINT
Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT
Device Object
Instance
Warning Text
USINT
BYTE[16]
Warning Time
Stamp
Help Object
Instance
Struct of:
Timer Value ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
UINT
1
3
Get
Get
Fault Data
Basic Info
Warning Code
Warning Source
Struct of:
UINT
Struct of:
DPI Port Number USINT
Device Object
Instance
USINT
Warning Time
Stamp
Timer Value
Struct of:
ULINT
Timer Descriptor WORD
Help Text STRING
Value
See
0
0x2c
See
See
0
0x2C
See
The common services in
Table 119 are implemented for the DPI Warning Object.
Table 119 - DPI Warning Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class
Yes
Yes
Instance
Yes
No
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
lists Warning Codes, Warning Text, and Warning Help Strings.
Table 120 - Warning Codes, Warning Text, and Warning Help Strings
0
1
Warning
Code
2
Warning Text
No Warning
OverloadWarning
Warning2
Warning Help Text
No Warning Conditions Detected
Approaching a motor current overload condition
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
265
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
266
39
40
41
42
43
44
33
34
35
36
37
38
50
51
48
49
45
46
47
31
32
29
30
27
28
25
26
23
24
21
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
Warning
Code
Warning Text
VoltageUnbalWarn
PhaseRotationWrn
UnderFreqWarning
OverFreqWarning
Warning23
Warning24
Warning25
Warning26
Warning27
Warning28
Warning29
Warning30
Warning31
Warning32
UnderKWWarning
OverKWWarning
UnderKVARConWarn
OverKVARConWarn
UnderKVARGenWarn
OverKVARGenWarn
Ground Fault
Warning4
JamWarning
UnderloadWarning
Current ImbalWarn
L1UnderCurrWarn
L2UnderCurrWarn
L3UnderCurrWarn
L1OverCurrenWarn
L2OverCurrenWarn
L3OverCurrenWarn
L1LineLossWarn
L2LineLossWarn
L3LineLossWarn
UnderVoltageWarn
OvervoltageWarn
Under Power kVA
Over Power kVA
Under PF Lagging
Over PF Lagging
Under PF Leading
Over PF Leading
Warning 45
Warning 46
Warning 47
Warning 48
Warning49
PTC
DLXWarning
Warning Help Text
Power conductor or motor winding is shorting to ground
Motor current has exceed the programmed jam warning level
Motor current has fallen below normal operating levels
Phase to phase current imbalance detected
L1Current was below L1 Undercurrent Warning Level
L2Current was below L2 Undercurrent Warning Level
L3Current was below L3 Undercurrent Warning Level
L1 Current was over L1 Overcurrent Warning Level
L2 Current was over L2 Overcurrent Warning Level
L3 Current was over L3 Overcurrent Warning Level
L1 Current Lost for longer than the L1 Loss Trip Delay
L2 Current Lost for longer than the L2 Loss Trip Delay
L3 Current Lost for longer than the L3 Loss Trip Delay
Line to Line Under-Voltage condition detected
Line to Line Over-Voltage condition detected
Phase to phase voltage imbalance detected
The unit detects the supply voltage phases are rotated
Line voltage frequency is below the warning level
Line voltage frequency has exceeded warning level
Total Real Power (kW) is below warning level
Total Real Power (kW) has exceeded warning level
Under Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Over Reactive Power Consumed (+kVAR) condition detected
Under Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Over Reactive Power Generated (-kVAR) condition detected
Total Apparent Power (kVA) is below warning level
Total Apparent Power (kVA) exceeded warning level
Under Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Lagging (-PF) condition detected
Under Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
Over Total Power Factor Leading (+PF) condition detected
PTC input indicates that the motor stator windings overheated
DeviceLogix defined warning was generated
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
Appendix B
Warning Help Text Warning Text
InAnMod2Ch00Warn
InAnMod2Ch01Warn
InAnMod2Ch02Warn
InAnMod3Ch00Warn
InAnMod3Ch01Warn
InAnMod3Ch02Warn
InAnMod4Ch00Warn
InAnMod4Ch01Warn
InAnMod4Ch02Warn
Warning77
Warning 78
Warning 79
Warning 80
DigitalMod1Warn
DigitalMod2Warn
DigitalMod3Warn
DigitalMod4Warn
AnalogMod1Warn
AnalogMod2Warn
AnalogMod3Warn
Warning52
Warning53
Warning54
Warning55
ConfigWarning
Warning57
DLXFBTimeoutWarn
Warning59
PM Starts
PM Oper Hours
Warning62
Warning63
Warning64
InAnMod1Ch00Warn
InAnMod1Ch01Warn
InAnMod1Ch02Warn
AnalogMod4Warn
Warning89
CtlModMismatch
SenseModMismatch
CommModMismatch
OperStatMismatch
DigModMismatch
AnModMismatch
Warning96
Warning97
HardwareFltWarn
Warning99
88
89
90
91
92
93
82
83
84
85
86
87
97
98
99
94
95
96
80
81
78
79
76
77
74
75
72
73
70
71
68
69
66
67
64
65
62
63
60
61
58
59
56
57
54
55
Warning
Code
52
53
Invalid parameter config. See parameters 38-39 for details
DeviceLogix Feedback Timeout Trip was detected
Number of Starts Warning Level Exceeded
Operating Hours Warning Level Exceeded
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 1 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 2 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 3 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 00 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 01 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Input Channel 02 on Analog Module 4 exceeded its Warning Level
Digital Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Digital Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 1 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 2 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 3 is not operating properly
Analog Expansion Module 4 is not operating properly
Control Module installed does not match the expected type
Sensing Module installed does not match the expected type
Comms Module installed does not match the expected type
Operator Station installed does not match expected type
Digital Module installed does not match the expected type
Analog Module installed does not match the expected type
A hardware fault condition was detected
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
267
Appendix B
Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) Objects
MCC Object — CLASS CODE 0x00C2
A single instance (instance 1) of the MCC Object is supported:
Table 121 - MCC Object Instance Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Name
7
8
9
10
5
6
3
4
1
2
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get
Get/Set
Get
Get/Set
Mcc Number
Vertical Section Number
Starting Section Letter
Space Factors
Cabinet Width
Mcc Number
Number of Device Inputs
Devices Connected at Inputs
Number of Device Outputs
Data Type Range
USINT
USINT
0…255
0…255
Value
0
0
USINT
USINT
USINT
USINT
0…255
0…255
0…255
0…255
65
0x3F
0
0
USINT
Array of USINT
USINT
Devices Connected at Outputs Array of USINT
EC1=2
EC2=EC3=EC4=4
EC5=6
00000000000000
2
0000
The common services in
Table 122 are implemented for the MCC Object.
Table 122 - MCC Object Common Services
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
0x18
0x19
Implemented for:
Class
No
No
No
No
Instance
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Get_Member
Set_Member
268
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Appendix
C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
DeviceNet I/O Instances
The E300™ Electronic Overload Relay’s DeviceNet Communication Module supports the following I/O Instances.
Table 123 - DeviceNet I/O Instances
133
171
172
186
198
199
131
132
120
120
120
144
Instance
51
100
Name
Basic Overload Input Assembly
Datalinks Produced Assembly
Configuration Assembly - Large Configuration
Configuration Assembly
Configuration Assembly for Non-Logix users
Default Consumed Assembly
Page
Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Basic Overload
Starter Status
Short Datalink
DeviceLogix Status
Analog Input Status
Network Output Status
Table 124 - Instance 51—Basic Overload Input Assembly
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
Bit/Byte Number
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2
X
Bit 1
X
Bit 0
X
Value
Tripped
Warning
0
Table 125 - Instance 51 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get
2
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
0
1
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
Value
2
1
8
67H & "Tripped"
1
8
67H & "Warning"
See data format above
1
"Trip Warn Status"
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
269
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 126 - Instance 100—Datalinks Produced Assembly
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
16
17
14
15
4
5
2
3
0
1
Instance 100—Datalinks Produced Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
0 Reserved for Logix
1
2
Datalink0
Datalink1
3
4
5
6
7
8
Datalink2
Datalink3
Datalink4
Datalink5
Datalink6
Datalink7
5 4 3 2 1 0
Member Size Path
0 32 1104
1
2
32
32
291
292
5
6
3
4
7
8
32
32
32
32
32
32
297
298
295
296
293
294
270
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Table 127 - Instance 100 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get
2
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
Value
9
32
6
21 0F 00 25 27 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 28 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 29 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 2A 01
See data format above
36
"Datalink Profile"
32
9
68H & "Reserved"
32
6
21 0F 00 25 23 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 24 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 25 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 26 01
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UDINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
Table 128 - Instance 120—Configuration Assembly - Large Configuration
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly - Large Configuration
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4
0
ConfigAssyRev = 3
Reserved
3 2
Delivery Mechanism Header *
Reserved
1
2
GUID
3
4
1 0
Member Size
2-1
4-3
16
16
5 128
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
271
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 129 - Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
19
20
21
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
8
9
10
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
3
4
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
0
0
ConfigAssyRev =2
1
Reserved
2
1 FLASetting
5
2 FLA2Setting
5 4 3 2
Delivery Mechanism Header *
SetOperatingMode
6
7
3
X
X
X X
X
OLWarningLevel
X
X
X
TripClass
OLPTCResetMode
SingleOrThreePh
GFFilter
GFMaxInghibit
PhaseRotTrip
PowerScale
VoltageScale
OLResetLevel
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
TripEnableI
WarningEnableI
TripEnableV
WarningEnableV
TripEnableP
WarningEnableP
TripEnableC
WarningEnableC
TripEnableA
WarningEnableA
TripHistoryMaskI
WarnHistoryMaskI
TripHistoryMaskV
WarnHistoryMaskV
TripHistoryMaskP
WarnHistoryMaskP
TripHistoryMaskC
WarnHistoryMaskC
TripHistoryMaskA
WarnHistoryMaskA
MismatchAction
29
14
SensingModuleTyp
ControlModuleTyp
1 0
Member Size Param
2 - 1
3
4
5
16
8
8
32
1100
195
1102
171
6
37
38
39
34
35
36
28
29
26
27
30
31
32
33
24
25
22
23
20
21
18
19
16
17
14
15
12
13
10
11
7
8
9
32
16
8
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
16
1
8
2
1
1
1
8
1
1
177
233
221
222
148
143
149
193
139
145
140
146
141
147
142
191
186
192
187
189
184
190
185
574
174
175
183
247
248
364
377
172
173
176
272
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
38
39
36
37
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
INT DINT 15
30
31
32
33
34
35
47
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
X
X
X
14
X
AnalogMod1Type
AnalogMod2Type
AnalogMod3Type
AnalogMod4Type
Reserved
OutCAssignment
InPt03Assignment
X
X
13
X
X
X
12
X
X
X
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
11
X
X
GFInhibitTime
GFWarningDelay
PLTripDelay
FnlFltValStDur
10
X
Reserved
X
9
X
OuBAssignment
InPt02Assignment
ActFLA2wOutput
EmergencyStartEn
X
8
X
X
7
X
X
StartsInterval
PMTotalStarts
PMOperatingHours
FeedbackTimeout
TransitionDelay
InterlockDelay
6 5
InPt01Assignment
InPt05Assignment
GFTripLevel
GFWarningLevel
X
X
X
X
OutAAssignment
4
X
X
3
X
2 1
OperStationType
DigitalMod1Type
DigitalMod2Type
DigitalMod3Type
DigitalMod4Type
X
X
0
X
StartsPerHour
OutPt00FnlFltVal
OutPt01FnlFltVal
OutPt02FnlFltVal
OutDig1FnlFltVal
OutDig2FnlFltVal
OutDig3FnlFltVal
OutDig4FnlFltVal
NetStrtFnlFltVal
GroundFaultType
GFTripDelay
PLInhibitTime
StallEnabledTime
Language
InPt00Assignment
InPt04Assignment
Member Size Param
70
71
68
69
66
67
64
65
62
63
60
61
58
59
56
57
54
55
52
53
50
51
48
49
46
47
44
45
42
43
40
41
78
79
76
77
80
81
82
83
74
75
72
73
84
85
86
87
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
8
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
8
2
2
3
2
3
3
4
3
8
8
16
16
8
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
8
8
8
566
567
568
573
562
563
564
565
209
216
NA
205
198
199
200
201
203
204
196
197
232
NA
212
202
228
229
230
231
224
225
226
227
214
215
241
242
243
245
244
246
206
207
208
213
239
240
249
561
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
273
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
69
74
75
72
73
76
77
70
71
55
56
57
58
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
48 StallTripLevel
49
24
JamTripDelay
50
51
25
JamTripLevel
JamWarningLevel
52
26
ULTripDelay
53
ULWarningLevel
54
27
CITripDelay
28
29
CIWarningLevel
L1UCTripDelay
CTPrimary
CTSecondary
59
L1UCWarningLevel
60
30
L2UCTripLevel
61
L3UCTripDelay
62
31
L3UCWarningLevel
63
L1OCTripDelay
64
32
L1OCWarningLevel
65
L2OCTripLevel
66
33
L3OCTripDelay
67
L3OCWarningLevel
68
34
L1LossTripDelay
35
36
37
38
L3LossTripDelay
Datalink0
Datalink1
Datalink2
Datalink3
Datalink4
Datalink5
Datalink6
Datalink7
5 4 3
JamInhibitTime
ULInhibitTime
ULTripLevel
CIInhibitTime
CITripLevel
UCInhibitTime
L1UCTripLevel
L2UCTripDelay
L2UCWarningLevel
L3UCTripLevel
OCInhibitTime
L1OCTripLevel
L2OCTripDelay
L2OCWarningLevel
L3OCTripLevel
LineLossInhTime
L2LossTripDelay
2 1 0
Member Size Param
116
117
118
119
112
113
114
115
108
109
110
111
104
105
106
107
100
101
102
103
98
99
96
97
94
95
92
93
90
91
88
89
129
130
131
132
126
127
128
133
134
120
121
122
123
124
125
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
16
8
8
16
8
8
8
8
8
8
16
8
8
16
16
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
16
16
8
8
8
8
8
8
278
279
280
281
274
275
276
277
270
271
272
273
266
267
268
269
262
263
264
265
258
259
260
261
254
255
256
257
250
251
252
253
293
294
295
296
288
291
292
297
298
282
283
284
285
286
287
274
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
OutPt00PrFltAct
OutPt00PrFltVal
OutPt00ComFltAct
OutPt00ComFltVal
78
OutPt00ComIdlAct
OutPt00ComIdlVal
OutPt01PrFltAct
OutPt01PrFltVal
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
39
X
79
OutPt02ComIdlAct
OutPt02ComIdlVal
OutDig1PrFltAct
OutDig1PrFltVal
OutDig1ComFltAct
OutDig1ComFltVal
OutDig1ComIdlAct
OutDig1ComIdlVal
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
80
40
OutDig3ComFltAct
OutDig3ComFltVal
OutDig3ComIdlAct
OutDig3ComIdlVal
OutDig4PrFltAct
OutDig4PrFltVal
OutDig4ComFltAct
OutDig4ComFltVal
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
81 PtDevOutCOSMask
5
X
X
X
4
X
3
OutPt01ComFltAct
OutPt01ComFltVal
OutPt01ComIdlAct
OutPt01ComIdlVal
OutPt02PrFltAct
OutPt02PrFltVal
OutPt02ComFltAct
OutPt02ComFltVal
X
X
X
X
OutDig2PrFltAct
OutDig2PrFltVal
OutDig2ComFltAct
OutDig2ComFltVal
OutDig2ComIdlAct
OutDig2ComIdlVal
OutDig3PrFltAct
OutDig3PrFltVal
X
OutDig4ComIdlAct
OutDig4ComIdlVal
CommOverride
NetworkOverride
NetStrtComFltAct
NetStrtComFltVal
NetStrtComIdlAct
NetStrtComIdlVal
2
X
X
X
1
X
X
X
0
X
X
X
Member Size Param
163
164
165
166
159
160
161
162
155
156
157
158
151
152
153
154
147
148
149
150
143
144
145
146
139
140
141
142
135
136
137
138
176
177
178
179
173
174
175
180
181
182
183
167
168
169
170
171
172
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
332
333
334
335
328
329
330
331
324
325
326
327
320
321
322
323
316
317
318
319
312
313
314
315
308
309
310
311
304
305
306
307
345
346
347
569
342
343
344
570
571
572
350
336
337
338
339
340
341
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
275
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
109
113
114
115
110
111
112
99
105
106
107
100
101
102
103
104
108
88
89
90
91
85
86
87
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
82
83
41
PTPrimary
PTSecondary
84
42
PhRotInhibitTime
43
UVTripDelay
UVTripLevel
UVWarningLevel
44
45
OVTripDelay
VUBTripDelay
OVTripLevel
OVWarningLevel
92
46
VUBWarningLevel
93
UFTripDelay
94
47
UFWarningLevel
95
OFTripDelay
96
48
OFWarningLevel
97
NumberOfPeriods
98
49
UWTripDelay
50
51
52
53
54
OWTripDelay
UVARCTripDelay
UWTripLevel
UWWarningLevel
OWTripLevel
OWWarningLevel
55
56
57
OVARCTripDelay
UVARCTripLevel
UVARCWarnLevel
OVARCTripLevel
5 4 3
VoltageMode
UVInhibitTime
OVInhibitTime
VUBInhibitTime
VUBTripLevel
UFInhibitTime
UFTripLevel
OFInhibitTime
OFTripLevel
DemandPeriod
UWInhibitTime
OWInhibitTime
UVARCInhibitTime
OVARCInhibitTime
2 1 0
Member Size Param
208
209
210
211
212
213
204
205
206
207
200
201
202
203
196
197
198
199
192
193
194
195
188
189
190
191
184
185
186
187
214
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
16
16
8
8
16
16
8
8
8
8
16
16
32
426
427
378
379
382
383
373
374
375
376
369
370
371
372
365
366
367
368
359
360
361
362
355
356
357
358
353
354
352
363
380
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
32
32
32
8
8
8
8
32
381
384
385
386
387
390
391
388
223
224
32
32
389
392
276
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
146
147
148
149
150
151
129
133
134
135
136
137
130
131
132
138
126
127
128
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
116
117
58 OVARCWarnLevel
118
59
UVARGTripDelay
60
61
62
63
OVARGTripDelay
UVARGTripLevel
UVARGWarnLevel
OVARGTripLevel
Instance 120 - Configuration Assembly
OVARGWarnLevel
64
UVATripDelay
65
66
67
68
69
OVATripDelay
UPFLagTripDelay
UVATripLevel
UVAWarningLevel
OVATripLevel
OVAWarningLevel
139
UPFLagWarnLevel
140
70
OPFLagTripDelay
141
OPFLagWarnLevel
142
71
UPFLeadTripDelay
143
UPFLeadWarnLevel
144
72
OPFLeadTripDelay
145
OPFLeadWarnLevel
73
74
75
Screen1Param1
Screen1Param2
Screen2Param1
Screen2Param2
Screen3Param1
Screen3Param2
5 4 3
UVARGInhibitTime
OVARGInhibitTime
UVAInhibitTime
OVAInhibitTime
UPFLagInhibTime
UPFLagTripLevel
OPFLagInhibTime
OPFLagTripLevel
UPFLeadInhibTime
UPFLeadTripLevel
OPFLeadInhibTime
OPFLeadTripDelay
2 1 0
Member Size Param
225
226
227
228
229
230
32
8
8
8
8
32
393
394
395
398
399
396
231 32 397
232 32 400
Member Size Param
233
234
235
236
237
238
32
8
8
8
8
32
401
402
403
406
407
404
239
240
241
250
251
252
253
254
247
248
249
242
243
244
245
246
258
259
260
261
255
256
257
262
263
32
32
32
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
8
8
405
408
409
418
419
420
421
422
415
416
417
410
411
412
413
414
428
429
430
431
423
424
425
432
433
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
277
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
169
170
171
172
173
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
152
153
154
155
76
77
Screen4Param1
Screen4Param2
DisplayTimeout
Reserved
156
26
8
78
InAMod1C1TripDly
26
9
79
80
81
Reserved
InAMod1C0TripLvl
InAMod1C0WarnLvl
InAMod1C1TripLvl
InAMod1C1WarnLvl
InAMod1C2TripLvl
InAMod1C2WarnLvl
5 4 3
InAMod1C0TripDly
InAMod1C2TripDly
2 1
InAnMod1Ch00Type
164
InAnMod1Ch01Type
82
X
InAnMod1Ch02Type
Reserved
165
166
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
InAMod1Ch1Format
InAMod1C1FiltFrq
InAMod1C1OpCktSt
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
OutAnMod1Select
InAMod1Ch0Format
InAMod1C0FiltFrq
InAMod1C0OpCktSt
X
X X
InAMod1Ch2Format
InAMod1C2FiltFrq
InAMod1C2OpCktSt
X
167
83
InAMod1C0TmpUnit
InAnMod1Ch0RTDEn
InAMod1C1TmpUnit
InAnMod1Ch1RTDEn
InAMod1C2TmpUnit
InAnMod1Ch2RTDEn
OutAnMod1EfltAct X X
X
X
X
X
X
168
84
X X
X X X
InAMod2C1TripDly
X
X X OutAnMod1PfltAct
OutAnMod1Type
Reserved
InAMod2C0TripDly
InAMod2C2TripDly
85
86
Reserved
InAMod2C0TripLvl
InAMod2C0WarnLvl
InAMod2C1TripLvl
InAMod2C1WarnLvl
0
Member Size Param
264
265
266
267
268
16
16
16
16
8
434
435
436
1103
443
X
X
269
298
299
300
301
294
295
296
297
290
291
292
293
286
287
288
289
305
306
307
308
309
302
303
304
282
283
284
285
278
279
280
281
274
275
276
277
270
271
272
273
8
4
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
3
3
3
16
16
16
8
16
8
8
8
3
2
8
3
5
1
5
5
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
8
452
466
467
464
1101
448
451
457
460
458
459
439
442
447
449
450
456
474
483
492
1102
475
476
484
485
465
438
440
441
437
446
455
1101
453
454
462
463
461
1102
444
445
278
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
180
90
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
91
92
93
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
174
175
87
InAMod2C2TripLvl
InAMod2C2WarnLvl
5
176
177
178
179
188
189
88
89
94
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
InAnMod2Ch02Type
X
X
X
X
Reserved
X X
InAMod2Ch1Format
InAMod2C1FiltFrq
InAMod2C1OpCktSt
X
X X
InAMod2C0TmpUnit
InAnMod2Ch0RTDEn
InAMod2C1TmpUnit
InAnMod2Ch1RTDEn
InAMod2C2TmpUnit
InAnMod2Ch2RTDEn
OutAnMod2EfltAct
X X
InAMod3C1TripDly
Reserved
InAnMod3Ch02Type
Reserved
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
InAnMod2Ch01Type
X
X
X
InAMod3C0TripLvl
InAMod3C0WarnLvl
InAMod3C1TripLvl
InAMod3C1WarnLvl
InAMod3C2TripLvl
InAMod3C2WarnLvl
X
X
X
X
X
InAnMod3Ch01Type
X
X
4 3
OutAnMod2Select
InAMod2Ch0Format
InAMod2C0FiltFrq
InAMod2C0OpCktSt
X
InAMod2Ch2Format
InAMod2C2FiltFrq
InAMod2C2OpCktSt
X
X
OutAnMod2PfltAct
OutAnMod2Type
Reserved
InAMod3C0TripDly
OutAnMod3Select
InAMod3Ch0Format
InAMod3C0FiltFrq
InAMod3C0OpCktSt
2
X
1
InAnMod2Ch00Type
X
InAMod3C2TripDly
X
X
X
InAnMod3Ch00Type
0
X
X
Member Size Param
338
339
340
341
334
335
336
337
330
331
332
333
326
327
328
329
322
323
324
325
318
319
320
321
314
315
316
317
310
311
312
313
348
349
350
351
352
353
342
343
344
345
346
347
16
16
8
8
8
8
4
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
8
3
5
1
5
5
16
16
5
1
8
3
3
2
16
16
16
16
5
5
523
1102
506
507
495
1101
505
514
488
491
497
498
470
473
479
482
481
487
489
490
471
472
478
480
486
1101
496
469
493
494
468
477
517
NA
527
500
502
503
515
516
524
525
499
508
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
279
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
190
InAMod3Ch1Format
InAMod3C1FiltFrq
InAMod3C1OpCktSt
X X X
X X
X X X
X X
191
95
InAMod3C0TmpUnit
InAnMod3Ch0RTDEn
InAMod3C1TmpUnit
InAnMod3Ch1RTDEn
InAMod3C2TmpUnit
InAnMod3Ch2RTDEn
OutAnMod3EfltAct X X
X X
X X X X
X X
192
96
InAMod4C1TripDly
97
98
99
Reserved
InAMod4C0TripLvl
InAMod4C0WarnLvl
InAMod4C1TripLvl
InAMod4C1WarnLvl
InAMod4C2TripLvl
InAMod4C2WarnLvl
5
X
X
4
X
X
3
X
InAMod3Ch2Format
InAMod3C2FiltFrq
InAMod3C2OpCktSt
X
OutAnMod3PfltAct
OutAnMod3Type
Reserved
InAMod4C0TripDly
InAMod4C2TripDly
2
X
X
1
X
X
InAnMod4Ch00Type
200
InAnMod4Ch01Type
100
X
InAnMod4Ch02Type
Reserved
201
X X
X X X
X X X
OutAnMod4Select
InAMod4Ch0Format
InAMod4C0FiltFrq
InAMod4C0OpCktSt
0
X
X
Member Size Param
382
383
384
385
378
379
380
381
386
387
374
375
376
377
370
371
372
373
366
367
368
369
362
363
364
365
358
359
360
361
354
355
356
357
8
3
5
1
3
2
5
5
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
8
8
8
4
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
3
3
3
548
1101
558
531
555
556
530
539
533
534
537
538
546
547
536
545
554
1102
528
529
526
1101
510
513
519
522
520
521
501
504
509
511
512
518
280
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
202
InAMod4Ch1Format
InAMod4C1FiltFrq
InAMod4C1OpCktSt
X X X
X X
X X X
X X
203
101
InAMod3C0TmpUnit
InAnMod4Ch0RTDEn
InAMod4C1TmpUnit
InAnMod4Ch1RTDEn
InAMod4C2TmpUnit
InAnMod4Ch2RTDEn
OutAnMod4EfltAct X X
X X
X X X X
X X
5
X
X
4
X
InAMod4Ch2Format
InAMod4C2FiltFrq
InAMod4C2OpCktSt
X
3
X
X
OutAnMod4PfltAct
OutAnMod4Type
Reserved
2
X
X
1
X
X
0
X
X
Member Size Param
400
401
402
403
396
397
398
399
392
393
394
395
388
389
390
391
4
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
2
3
3
3
559
560
557
1001
541
544
550
553
551
552
532
535
540
542
543
549
shows a simplified version of Instance 120 of the Assembly. It is not included in the EDS file. This version is only available to non-Logix users.
Table 130 - Instance 120—Configuration Assembly (Non-Logix)
0
1
2
3
0
1
Instance 120—Configuration Assembly (Non-Logix)
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
ConfigAssyRev = 1
8 7
Reserved
FLASetting
6 5
4
5
3
X X X X X
OLWarningLevel
X
X
X
4 3
Reserved
TripClass
OLPTCResetMode
SingleOrThreePh
Reserved
OLResetLevel
2 1 0
7
8
9
4
5
6
Member Size Param
3
1
2
16
16
32
1002
NA
171
6
8
8
8
1
1
NA
174
175
172
173
176
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
281
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 131 - Instance 144—Default Consumed Assembly
2
3
Instance 144—Default Consumed Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
0 OutputStatus0
NetworkStart1
1
0
NetworkStart2
TripReset
EmergencyStop
RemoteTrip
Reserved
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X X X
1
PtDeviceIns
AnDeviceIns
5
X
4
X
3
X
HMILED1Green
HMILED2Green
HMILED3Green
HMILED3Red
HMILED4Red
Reserved
2
X
1
X
0
X
Member Size Path
12
13
14
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
16 Param18
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
NA
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
Symbolic
NA
16 Symbolic
16 Symbolic
282
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Table 132 - Instance 144 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get
Get
Get
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
Value
15
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
16
6
21 0F 00 25 12 00
1
14
Packed EPATH 6DH & "NetworkStart1"
UINT 1
UINT 14
Packed EPATH 6DH & "NetworkStart2"
UINT
UINT
1
10
Packed EPATH
UINT
69H & "TripReset"
1
UINT 14
Packed EPATH 6DH & "EmergencyStop"
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
1
11
6AH & "RemoteTrip"
3
0 UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
1
13
Packed EPATH 6CH & "HMILED1Green"
UINT 1
UINT 13
Packed EPATH 6CH & "HMILED2Green"
UINT
UINT
1
13
Packed EPATH 6CH & "HMILED3Green"
UINT 1
UINT 11
Packed EPATH 6AH & "HMILED3Red"
UINT
UINT
1
11
Packed EPATH 6AH & "HMILED4Red"
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
3
0
UINT 16
UINT 12
Packed EPATH 6BH & "PtDeviceIns"
UINT
UINT
16
12
Packed EPATH 6BH & "AnDeviceIns"
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
283
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
284
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
3 Get
4
100
Get
Get
Data
Size
Name
Name Data Type
UINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
Value
See data format above
8
"E300 Consumed"
Table 133 - Instance 198 Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
39
40
37
38
41
34
35
36
28
29
26
27
30
31
32
33
24
25
22
23
17
18
15
16
19
8
9
Instance 198—Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
7
8
5
6
3
4
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0
1
0
2
1
2
3
4
9
10
5
11
12
6
13
14
7
8 7
Reserved for Logix
DeviceStaus0
DeviceStaus1
InputStatus0
InputStatus1
OutputStatus
OpStationStatus
TripStsCurrent
WarnStsCurrent
TripStsVoltage
WarnStsVoltage
TripStsPower
WarnStsPower
TripStsControl
WarnStsControl
TripStsAnalog
WarnStsAnalog
Reserved
MismatchStatus
6 5
20
10 CurrentImbal
4 3
ThermUtilizedPct
21 AvgPercentFLA
11
12
AverageCurrent
L1Current
13
14
15
16
L2Current
L3Current
GFCurrent
Reserved
Datalink0
17
18
19
20
Datalink1
Datalink2
Datalink3
Datalink4
2 1 0
Member Size Path
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
32
32
32
16
16
32
32
32
32
32
43
44
292
293
294
295
0
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
1
3
2
18
19
16
17
20
21
22
32
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
16
16
8
16
32
45
51
1103
291
1104
13
8
12
7
11
6
10
5
19
4
17
18
20
21
16
14
1103
40
1
52
50
46
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
64
65
62
63
60
61
58
59
56
57
54
55
52
53
50
51
48
49
46
47
Instance 198—Current Diagnostics Produced Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
44
45
42
43
21
22
Datalink5
Datalink6
23
24
25
26
27
Datalink7
PtDeviceOuts
AnDeviceOuts
InAnMod1Ch00
InAnMod1Ch01
InAnMod1Ch02
AnalogMod1Status
InAnMod2Ch00
InAnMod2Ch01
28
29
30
31
32
InAnMod2Ch02
AnalogMod2Status
InAnMod3Ch00
InAnMod3Ch01
InAnMod3Ch02
AnalogMod3Status
InAnMod4Ch00
InAnMod4Ch01
InAnMod4Ch02
AnalogMod4Status
4 3 2 1 0
Member Size Path
33 32 296
34
35
50
51
48
49
52
53
46
47
44
45
42
43
40
41
38
39
36
37
32
32
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
297
298
119
125
120
121
116
124
117
118
122
126
113
123
114
115
348
1105
111
112
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
285
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
286
Table 134 - Instance 198 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get
Get
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
Value
54
16
6
21 0F 00 25 12 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 13 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 04 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 0A 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 05 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 0B 00
32
9
68H & "Reserved"
16
6
21 0F 00 25 14 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 15 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 10 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 11 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 06 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 0C 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 07 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 0D 00
16
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
Get
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Name
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Value
6
21 0F 00 25 08 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 0E 00
16
0
32
6
32 0F 00 25 2B 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 2C 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 2D 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 33 00
16
0
16
6
21 0F 00 25 28 00
8
6
21 0F 00 25 01 00
8
6
21 0F 00 25 34 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 32 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 2E 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 23 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 24 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 25 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 26 01
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
Data Type
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
287
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
Get
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
Name
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
Value
32
6
21 0F 00 27 23 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 28 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 29 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 2A 01
16
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
6
21 0F 00 25 5C 01
16
13
Packed EPATH 6CH & "AnDeviceOuts"
UINT 16
UINT
Packed EPATH
6
21 0F 00 25 6F 00
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
16
6
21 0F 00 25 70 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 71 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 7B 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 72 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 73 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 74 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 7C 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 75 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 76 00
288
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
48
49
50
51
52
53
Name
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
21
22
23
Table 135 - Instance 199—All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
Instance 199—All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
7
8
5
6
3
4
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0
1
0
2
1
2
3
4
9
10
5
11
12
6
15
16
13
14
17
7
8
8 7
Reserved for Logix
DeviceStaus0
DeviceStaus1
InputStatus0
InputStatus1
OutputStatus
OpStationStatus
TripStsCurrent
WarnStsCurrent
TripStsVoltage
WarnStsVoltage
TripStsPower
WarnStsPower
TripStsControl
WarnStsControl
TripStsAnalog
WarnStsAnalog
6 5
18
19
9
Reserved
4 3 2 1
20
10 CurrentImbalance
ThermUtilizedPct
11
AvgPercentFLA
AverageCurrent
0
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
Value
16
6
21 0F 00 25 77 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 7D 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 78 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 79 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 7A 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 7E 00
See data format above
132
"Current Diags"
Member Size Path
0
14
15
12
13
16
10
11
8
9
17
18
19
20
21
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
22
32
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
32
1104
13
8
12
7
14
11
6
10
5
1104
40
1
52
50
19
4
17
18
20
21
16
46
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
289
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
67
68
65
66
62
63
64
69
70
71
56
57
58
59
60
61
54
55
52
53
50
51
48
49
46
47
44
45
42
43
40
41
38
39
36
37
34
35
32
33
30
31
28
29
Instance 199—All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
26
27
24
25
12
13
L1Current
L2Current
14
15
16
17
L3Current
GFCurrent
Reserved
AvgVoltageLtoL
L1toL2Voltage
L2toL3Voltage
L3toL1Voltage
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
TotalRealPower
TotalReactivePwr
TotalApparentPwr
TotalPowerFactor
Reserved
Datalink0
Datalink1
Datalink2
Datalink3
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Datalink4
Datalink5
Datalink6
Datalink7
PtDeviceOuts
AnDeviceOuts
InAnMod1Ch00
InAnMod1Ch01
InAnMod1Ch02
AnalogMod1Status
InAnMod2Ch00
InAnMod2Ch01
InAnMod2Ch02
AnalogMod2Status
InAnMod3Ch00
InAnMod3Ch01
4 3 2 1
39
40
37
38
35
36
33
34
41
42
43
51
52
49
50
46
47
44
45
48
53
54
55
0
Member Size Path
23 32 43
24
25
28
29
26
27
30
31
32
32
32
16
16
16
16
16
16
32
44
45
51
1103
56
53
54
55
67
32
32
32
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
296
297
298
123
114
115
116
348
1105
111
112
113
124
117
118
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
294
295
292
293
79
291
71
75
290
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Instance 199—All Diagnostics Produced Assembly
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
74
75
72
73
76
77
36
37
38
InAnMod3Ch02
AnalogMod3Status
InAnMod4Ch00
InAnMod4Ch01
InAnMod4Ch02
AnalogMod4Status
4 3 2 1 0
Member Size Path
58
59
56
57
60
61
16
16
16
16
16
16
119
125
120
121
122
126
Table 136 - Instance 199 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
0…27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36…61
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
Save as members 0…27 in assembly instance 198
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
Same as members 28…53 from assembly instance 198 above
UINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
Value
62
See data format above
156
"All Diags"
16
6
21 0F 00 25 38 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 35 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 36 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 37 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 43 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 47 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 4B 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 4F 00
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
291
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 137 - Instance 131—Basic Overload
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Instance 131—Basic Overload
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
0
Device Status0
Device Status1
1
2
Input Status 0
Input Status 1
Output Status
OpStation Status
3
4
Reserved
Average %FLA
Average Current
6 5 4 3
% Thermal Utilized
2 1 0
Member Size Path
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
8
16
16
16
16
16
16
8
16
32 46
1
50
18
19
16
17
20
21
292
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Table 138 - Instance 131 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
Value
10
16
6
21 0F 00 25 32 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 2E 00
See data format above
20
"Basic Overload"
16
6
21 0F 00 25 14 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 15 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 10 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 11 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 12 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 13 00
8
6
21 0F 00 25 01 00
8
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
293
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 139 - Instance 132—Starter Status
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Instance 132—Starter Status
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
0
Device Status0
Device Status1
1
Input Status 0
Input Status 1
2 L1 Current
3
4
L2 Current
L3 Current
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Member Size Path
2
3
0
1
4
16
16
16
16
32 43
16
17
20
21
5
6
32
32
44
45
Table 140 - Instance 132 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
Value
7
16
6
21 0F 00 25 14 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 15 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 10 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 11 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 2B 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 2C 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 2D 00
See data format above
20 (0x14)
"Basic Status"
294
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Table 141 - Instance 133—Short Datalink
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Instance 133—Short Datalink
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
0
Device Status0
DeviceStatus1
1
2
Datalink0
Datalink1
3
4
Datalink2
Datalink3
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Member Size Path
0
1
2
16
16
32
20
21
291
3
4
5
32
32
32
292
293
294
Attribute ID Access Rule
1 Get
Get
Table 142 - Instance 133 Attributes
Member Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
Value
6
16
6
21 0F 00 25 14 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 15 00
32
6
21 0F 00 25 23 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 24 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 25 01
32
6
21 0F 00 25 26 01
See data format above
20 (0x14)
"Short Datalink"
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Table 143 - Instance 171—DeviceLogix Status
4
5
2
3
6
0
1
Instance 171—DeviceLogix Status
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
0
Device Status0
Device Status1
1
2
Input Status 0
Input Status 1
Output Status
OpStation Status
Network Output
5 4 3 2 1 0
Member Size Path
4
5
6
2
3
0
1
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
18
19
348
16
17
20
21
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
295
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Table 144 - Instance 171 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
Value
7
16
6
21 0F 00 25 14 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 15 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 10 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 11 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 12 00
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
16
6
21 0F 00 25 13 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 5C 01
UINT
UINT
See data format above
14 (0x0E)
SHORT_STRING "DeviceLogix Stat"
296
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Table 145 - Instance 172—Analog Input Status
20
21
18
19
16
17
14
15
12
13
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Instance 172—Analog Input Status
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
0
Device Status0
Device Status1
1
2
Input Status 0
Input Status 1
Output Status
OpStation Status
3
4
5
6
AnalogStatus1
AnalogStatus 2
AnalogStatus3
AnalogStatus 4
AnalogInput11
AnalogInput12
AnalogInput13
AnalogInput21
7
8
9
10
AnalogInput22
AnalogInput23
AnalogInput31
AnalogInput32
AnalogInput33
AnalogInput41
AnalogInput42
AnalogInput43
5 4 3 2 1 0
Table 146 - Instance 172 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get
Get
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
Member Size Path
14
15
12
13
10
11
9
8
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
18
19
16
17
20
21
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
113
114
115
116
125
126
111
112
18
19
123
124
16
17
20
21
117
118
119
120
121
122
Value
22
16
6
21 0F 00 25 14 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 15 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 10 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 11 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 12 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 13 00
16
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
297
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
298
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Name
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
21 0F 00 25 6F 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 70 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 71 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 72 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 73 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 74 00
Value
6
21 0F 00 25 7B 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 7C 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 7D 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 7E 00
16
6
16
6
21 0F 00 25 75 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 76 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 77 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 78 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 79 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 7A 00
See data format above
44 (0x2C)
"Input Status"
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
Data Type
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
SHORT_STRING
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Appendix C
Table 147 - Instance 186—Network Output Status
0
1
Instance 186—Network Output Status
INT DINT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6
2
0
Device Status0
Device Status1
Network Output
5 4 3 2 1 0
Member Size Path
0
1
2
16
16
16
20
21
348
Table 148 - Instance 186 Attributes
Attribute ID Access Rule Member Index
1 Get
3
4
100
Get
Get
Get
Get
0
1
2
Name
Number of Members in Member List
Member List
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Member Data Description
Member Path Size
Member Path
Data
Size
Name
Data Type
UINT
Array of STRUCT
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
UINT
UINT
Packed EPATH
Value
3
16
6
21 0F 00 25 14 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 15 00
16
6
21 0F 00 25 5C 01
UINT
UINT
See data format above
6
SHORT_STRING "Network OutpSts"
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
299
Appendix C
DeviceNet I/O Assemblies
Notes:
300
Rockwell Automation Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Symbols
A
See modes
apparent power
assembly object
average current 157 average L-L voltage 157
C
analog input point object, class code 0x000A
base energy object, class code 0x004E 256
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
Index
connection object, class code 0x0005 246
control supervisor object, class code 0x0029
discrete input point object, class code 0x0008
discrete output group object, class code
discrete output point object, class code 0x0009
DPI warning object, class code 0x0098 264
electrical energy object, class code 0x004F
instance 120, configuration assembly rev. 1 242
instance 120, configuration assembly rev. 2 233
instance 144, default consumed assembly 242 instance 198, current diagnostics produced assembly 242
instance 199, diagnostics produced assembly
parameter group object, class code 0x0010
301
Index
302
wall clock time object, class code 0x008B 260
combatibility
configuration preset 149 trip reset 149
communication module
communication options
configuration
configuration preset 149 factory defaults 149
configuration states
output relay communication fault mode 37
output relay communication idle mode 38
output relay protection fault mode 37
control module
control trip status 155 control warning status 155
expansion bus fault 145 hardware fault 145 nonvolatile storage fault
preventive maintenance 144 remote trip 144 start inhibit 144
current
current trip status 155 current warning status 155
line overcurrent 128 line undercurrent 128
D
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
Index
device configuration policy 35
day 156 device status 0 156 device status 1 156 expansion digital module ID
input status 1 156 invalid configuration cause
percent thermal capacity utilized 155 power trip status 155 power warning status 155
second 156 sensing module ID 156 starts available 156 starts counter 156
time to trip 155 voltage trip status 155 voltage warning status 155
device status 0 156 device status 1 156
DeviceLogix 167 output relay overrides 167
diagnostic information
navigation keys 25 parameter display 25
display sequence 29 programmable 29
E
EDS file
EDS file installation
electronic data sheet
limitations 184 text notification 184
kVAh 10^0 160 kVAh 10^-3 160 kVAh 10^3 160 kVAh 10^6 160 kVAh 10^9 160
kVARh consumed 10^0 160 kVARh consumed 10^-3
160 kVARh consumed 10^3 160 kVARh consumed 10^6 160
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
303
Index
304
kVARh consumed 10^9 160 kVARh generated 10^0 160 kVARh generated 10^-3
kWh 10^3 159 kWh 10^6 159 kWh 10^9 159
max. kVA demand 161 max. kVAR demand 161 max. kW demand 161
view and configure parameters 175
expansion bus
expansion module
expansion modules
F
firmware
updating 201 firmware compatibility 201
firmware updates 201 compatibility 201
FRN
See
G
ground fault current protection
ground fault current-based protection 24
H
I
I/O assignments 35 input Pt00 35
identity object
introduction to operating modes
invalid configuration cause 156
See modes
invalid configuration parameter
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
Index
J
K
kVAh 10^0 160 kVAh 10^-3 160 kVAh 10^3 160 kVAh 10^6 160 kVAh 10^9 160
kWh 10^3 159 kWh 10^6 159 kWh 10^9 159
L
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
LEDs
line overcurrent protection 128 line undercurrent protection 128
M
message router
messaging
305
Index
306
minute 156 mismatch status 156
modes
modular design
module description
N network
network address
network parameters
assign via BOOTP/DHCP utility 171
network start configuration states 50
non-reversing starter operating modes 57
local I/O, three-wire control with feedback 68
local I/O, two-wire control with feedback 65
network and local I/O with feedback, three-wire control 77
network and local I/O, three-wire control
network and local I/O, twowire control 72
network and local I/O, twowire control with feedback 74
network and operator station 69
network and operator station with feedback
operator station with feedback 62
notification
O
operating statistics, clear 153
operation
operator station ID 156 operator station status 156
analog I/O expansion module 1 type 34 analog I/O expansion module 3 type 34
analog I/O expansion module 4 type 35
communication module type 33 control module type 33 digital I/O expansion module 1 type 33
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
Index
ule 3 type 34 digital I/O expansion module 4 type 34
enable option match protection trip 32 enable option match protection warning 32
operator station type 33 sensing module type 33
override
overview
communication options 19 diagnostic information 19
P parameter
parameters
view and configure 175 viewing 175
percent FLA
percent thermal capacity utilized 155
policy
device configuration 35 device reset 35 firmware update 35 security 35 security configuration 35
power factor
power LED
L3 real power 158 power scale 158
total apparent power 159 total power factor 159 total reactive power 159
total real power 158 power scale 158
power trip status 155 power warning status 155
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
307
Index
308
programming
protection
24 power based 24 thermal based 24 voltage based 24
protective trip and warning functions 119
R reactive power
See modes
real power
reversing starter operating modes 80
local I/O, two-wire control with feedback 89
network and operator station 92
network and operator station, three-wire control 95
network and operator station, two-wire control 94
operator station with feedback 85
S screens
security configuration policy 35 security policy 35
sensing module
setting IP network address 170
assign network parameters via BOOTP/ DHCP utility 171
EtherNet/IP node address selection switches
simplified wiring
starts available 156 starts counter 156
system configuration 31 system operation 31
T
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
Index
total apparent power 159 total power factor 159, 166 total reactive power 159, 166
trip
trip/warn LED
trip/warning history 161 trip history 161
troubleshooting 207 advisory LEDs 207 power LED 207
two-speed starter operating modes 98
local I/O, two-wire with feedback 108
network and local I/O, three-wire control
network and local I/O, twowire control 113
network and operator station 111
operator station with feedback 104
U
V
voltage
voltage- and power-based protection 24
voltage monitor 157 average L-L voltage 157
average L-N voltage 158 frequency 158
L3-N voltage 158 phase rotation 158 voltage imbalance 158
voltage trip status 155 voltage warning status 155
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
309
Index
W
Y
310
Rockwell Automation Publication XXXX-X.X.X - Month Year
.
Rockwell Automation Support
Use the following resources to access support information.
Technical Support Center
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers
Direct Dial Codes
Literature Library
Product Compatibility and Download
Center (PCDC)
Knowledgebase Articles, How-to Videos, FAQs, Chat, User
Forums, and Product Notification Updates.
Locate the phone number for your country.
Find the Direct Dial Code for your product. Use the code to route your call directly to a technical support engineer.
Installation Instructions, Manuals, Brochures, and
Technical Data.
Get help determining how products interact, check features and capabilities, and find associated firmware.
https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/ http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/get-support-now.page
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/direct-dial.page
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/pcdc.page
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete the
How Are We Doing? form at http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/du/ra-du002_-en-e.pdf
.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page
.
Allen-Bradley, CopyCat, Connected Components Workbench, EtherNet/IP, E300, DeviceLogix, Logix5000, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, RSLogix, RSNetworx, and Studio 5000 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400
Publication 193-UM015F-EN-P - August 2018
Supersedes Publication 193-UM015E-EN-P - October 2015 Copyright © 2018 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Advertisement
Key features
- Wide range of protection functions
- Variety of monitoring functions
- Rugged construction
- Easy-to-use interface
- Diagnostic functions
- Status indicators
- Inputs/Outputs
- Test/Reset Button
- Single/Three-Phase Operation
